1 /* Expand the basic unary and binary arithmetic operations, for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1987-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3
4 This file is part of GCC.
5
6 GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
7 the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
8 Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later
9 version.
10
11 GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
12 WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
13 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
14 for more details.
15
16 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
17 along with GCC; see the file COPYING3. If not see
18 <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. */
19
20
21 #include "config.h"
22 #include "system.h"
23 #include "coretypes.h"
24 #include "backend.h"
25 #include "target.h"
26 #include "rtl.h"
27 #include "tree.h"
28 #include "memmodel.h"
29 #include "predict.h"
30 #include "tm_p.h"
31 #include "expmed.h"
32 #include "optabs.h"
33 #include "emit-rtl.h"
34 #include "recog.h"
35 #include "diagnostic-core.h"
36 #include "rtx-vector-builder.h"
37
38 /* Include insn-config.h before expr.h so that HAVE_conditional_move
39 is properly defined. */
40 #include "stor-layout.h"
41 #include "except.h"
42 #include "dojump.h"
43 #include "explow.h"
44 #include "expr.h"
45 #include "optabs-tree.h"
46 #include "libfuncs.h"
47
48 static void prepare_float_lib_cmp (rtx, rtx, enum rtx_code, rtx *,
49 machine_mode *);
50 static rtx expand_unop_direct (machine_mode, optab, rtx, rtx, int);
51 static void emit_libcall_block_1 (rtx_insn *, rtx, rtx, rtx, bool);
52
53 /* Debug facility for use in GDB. */
54 void debug_optab_libfuncs (void);
55
56 /* Add a REG_EQUAL note to the last insn in INSNS. TARGET is being set to
57 the result of operation CODE applied to OP0 (and OP1 if it is a binary
58 operation). OP0_MODE is OP0's mode.
59
60 If the last insn does not set TARGET, don't do anything, but return 1.
61
62 If the last insn or a previous insn sets TARGET and TARGET is one of OP0
63 or OP1, don't add the REG_EQUAL note but return 0. Our caller can then
64 try again, ensuring that TARGET is not one of the operands. */
65
66 static int
add_equal_note(rtx_insn * insns,rtx target,enum rtx_code code,rtx op0,rtx op1,machine_mode op0_mode)67 add_equal_note (rtx_insn *insns, rtx target, enum rtx_code code, rtx op0,
68 rtx op1, machine_mode op0_mode)
69 {
70 rtx_insn *last_insn;
71 rtx set;
72 rtx note;
73
74 gcc_assert (insns && INSN_P (insns) && NEXT_INSN (insns));
75
76 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != RTX_COMM_ARITH
77 && GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != RTX_BIN_ARITH
78 && GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != RTX_COMM_COMPARE
79 && GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != RTX_COMPARE
80 && GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != RTX_UNARY)
81 return 1;
82
83 if (GET_CODE (target) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
84 return 1;
85
86 for (last_insn = insns;
87 NEXT_INSN (last_insn) != NULL_RTX;
88 last_insn = NEXT_INSN (last_insn))
89 ;
90
91 /* If TARGET is in OP0 or OP1, punt. We'd end up with a note referencing
92 a value changing in the insn, so the note would be invalid for CSE. */
93 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (target, op0)
94 || (op1 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (target, op1)))
95 {
96 if (MEM_P (target)
97 && (rtx_equal_p (target, op0)
98 || (op1 && rtx_equal_p (target, op1))))
99 {
100 /* For MEM target, with MEM = MEM op X, prefer no REG_EQUAL note
101 over expanding it as temp = MEM op X, MEM = temp. If the target
102 supports MEM = MEM op X instructions, it is sometimes too hard
103 to reconstruct that form later, especially if X is also a memory,
104 and due to multiple occurrences of addresses the address might
105 be forced into register unnecessarily.
106 Note that not emitting the REG_EQUIV note might inhibit
107 CSE in some cases. */
108 set = single_set (last_insn);
109 if (set
110 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set)) == code
111 && MEM_P (SET_DEST (set))
112 && (rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (set), XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 0))
113 || (op1 && rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (set),
114 XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 1)))))
115 return 1;
116 }
117 return 0;
118 }
119
120 set = set_for_reg_notes (last_insn);
121 if (set == NULL_RTX)
122 return 1;
123
124 if (! rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (set), target)
125 /* For a STRICT_LOW_PART, the REG_NOTE applies to what is inside it. */
126 && (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set)) != STRICT_LOW_PART
127 || ! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (SET_DEST (set), 0), target)))
128 return 1;
129
130 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == RTX_UNARY)
131 switch (code)
132 {
133 case FFS:
134 case CLZ:
135 case CTZ:
136 case CLRSB:
137 case POPCOUNT:
138 case PARITY:
139 case BSWAP:
140 if (op0_mode != VOIDmode && GET_MODE (target) != op0_mode)
141 {
142 note = gen_rtx_fmt_e (code, op0_mode, copy_rtx (op0));
143 if (GET_MODE_UNIT_SIZE (op0_mode)
144 > GET_MODE_UNIT_SIZE (GET_MODE (target)))
145 note = simplify_gen_unary (TRUNCATE, GET_MODE (target),
146 note, op0_mode);
147 else
148 note = simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND, GET_MODE (target),
149 note, op0_mode);
150 break;
151 }
152 /* FALLTHRU */
153 default:
154 note = gen_rtx_fmt_e (code, GET_MODE (target), copy_rtx (op0));
155 break;
156 }
157 else
158 note = gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code, GET_MODE (target), copy_rtx (op0), copy_rtx (op1));
159
160 set_unique_reg_note (last_insn, REG_EQUAL, note);
161
162 return 1;
163 }
164
165 /* Given two input operands, OP0 and OP1, determine what the correct from_mode
166 for a widening operation would be. In most cases this would be OP0, but if
167 that's a constant it'll be VOIDmode, which isn't useful. */
168
169 static machine_mode
widened_mode(machine_mode to_mode,rtx op0,rtx op1)170 widened_mode (machine_mode to_mode, rtx op0, rtx op1)
171 {
172 machine_mode m0 = GET_MODE (op0);
173 machine_mode m1 = GET_MODE (op1);
174 machine_mode result;
175
176 if (m0 == VOIDmode && m1 == VOIDmode)
177 return to_mode;
178 else if (m0 == VOIDmode || GET_MODE_UNIT_SIZE (m0) < GET_MODE_UNIT_SIZE (m1))
179 result = m1;
180 else
181 result = m0;
182
183 if (GET_MODE_UNIT_SIZE (result) > GET_MODE_UNIT_SIZE (to_mode))
184 return to_mode;
185
186 return result;
187 }
188
189 /* Widen OP to MODE and return the rtx for the widened operand. UNSIGNEDP
190 says whether OP is signed or unsigned. NO_EXTEND is nonzero if we need
191 not actually do a sign-extend or zero-extend, but can leave the
192 higher-order bits of the result rtx undefined, for example, in the case
193 of logical operations, but not right shifts. */
194
195 static rtx
widen_operand(rtx op,machine_mode mode,machine_mode oldmode,int unsignedp,int no_extend)196 widen_operand (rtx op, machine_mode mode, machine_mode oldmode,
197 int unsignedp, int no_extend)
198 {
199 rtx result;
200 scalar_int_mode int_mode;
201
202 /* If we don't have to extend and this is a constant, return it. */
203 if (no_extend && GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
204 return op;
205
206 /* If we must extend do so. If OP is a SUBREG for a promoted object, also
207 extend since it will be more efficient to do so unless the signedness of
208 a promoted object differs from our extension. */
209 if (! no_extend
210 || !is_a <scalar_int_mode> (mode, &int_mode)
211 || (GET_CODE (op) == SUBREG && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (op)
212 && SUBREG_CHECK_PROMOTED_SIGN (op, unsignedp)))
213 return convert_modes (mode, oldmode, op, unsignedp);
214
215 /* If MODE is no wider than a single word, we return a lowpart or paradoxical
216 SUBREG. */
217 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (int_mode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD)
218 return gen_lowpart (int_mode, force_reg (GET_MODE (op), op));
219
220 /* Otherwise, get an object of MODE, clobber it, and set the low-order
221 part to OP. */
222
223 result = gen_reg_rtx (int_mode);
224 emit_clobber (result);
225 emit_move_insn (gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (op), result), op);
226 return result;
227 }
228
229 /* Expand vector widening operations.
230
231 There are two different classes of operations handled here:
232 1) Operations whose result is wider than all the arguments to the operation.
233 Examples: VEC_UNPACK_HI/LO_EXPR, VEC_WIDEN_MULT_HI/LO_EXPR
234 In this case OP0 and optionally OP1 would be initialized,
235 but WIDE_OP wouldn't (not relevant for this case).
236 2) Operations whose result is of the same size as the last argument to the
237 operation, but wider than all the other arguments to the operation.
238 Examples: WIDEN_SUM_EXPR, VEC_DOT_PROD_EXPR.
239 In the case WIDE_OP, OP0 and optionally OP1 would be initialized.
240
241 E.g, when called to expand the following operations, this is how
242 the arguments will be initialized:
243 nops OP0 OP1 WIDE_OP
244 widening-sum 2 oprnd0 - oprnd1
245 widening-dot-product 3 oprnd0 oprnd1 oprnd2
246 widening-mult 2 oprnd0 oprnd1 -
247 type-promotion (vec-unpack) 1 oprnd0 - - */
248
249 rtx
expand_widen_pattern_expr(sepops ops,rtx op0,rtx op1,rtx wide_op,rtx target,int unsignedp)250 expand_widen_pattern_expr (sepops ops, rtx op0, rtx op1, rtx wide_op,
251 rtx target, int unsignedp)
252 {
253 class expand_operand eops[4];
254 tree oprnd0, oprnd1, oprnd2;
255 machine_mode wmode = VOIDmode, tmode0, tmode1 = VOIDmode;
256 optab widen_pattern_optab;
257 enum insn_code icode;
258 int nops = TREE_CODE_LENGTH (ops->code);
259 int op;
260 bool sbool = false;
261
262 oprnd0 = ops->op0;
263 tmode0 = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (oprnd0));
264 if (ops->code == VEC_UNPACK_FIX_TRUNC_HI_EXPR
265 || ops->code == VEC_UNPACK_FIX_TRUNC_LO_EXPR)
266 /* The sign is from the result type rather than operand's type
267 for these ops. */
268 widen_pattern_optab
269 = optab_for_tree_code (ops->code, ops->type, optab_default);
270 else if ((ops->code == VEC_UNPACK_HI_EXPR
271 || ops->code == VEC_UNPACK_LO_EXPR)
272 && VECTOR_BOOLEAN_TYPE_P (ops->type)
273 && VECTOR_BOOLEAN_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (oprnd0))
274 && TYPE_MODE (ops->type) == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (oprnd0))
275 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (TYPE_MODE (ops->type)))
276 {
277 /* For VEC_UNPACK_{LO,HI}_EXPR if the mode of op0 and result is
278 the same scalar mode for VECTOR_BOOLEAN_TYPE_P vectors, use
279 vec_unpacks_sbool_{lo,hi}_optab, so that we can pass in
280 the pattern number of elements in the wider vector. */
281 widen_pattern_optab
282 = (ops->code == VEC_UNPACK_HI_EXPR
283 ? vec_unpacks_sbool_hi_optab : vec_unpacks_sbool_lo_optab);
284 sbool = true;
285 }
286 else
287 widen_pattern_optab
288 = optab_for_tree_code (ops->code, TREE_TYPE (oprnd0), optab_default);
289 if (ops->code == WIDEN_MULT_PLUS_EXPR
290 || ops->code == WIDEN_MULT_MINUS_EXPR)
291 icode = find_widening_optab_handler (widen_pattern_optab,
292 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (ops->op2)),
293 tmode0);
294 else
295 icode = optab_handler (widen_pattern_optab, tmode0);
296 gcc_assert (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing);
297
298 if (nops >= 2)
299 {
300 oprnd1 = ops->op1;
301 tmode1 = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (oprnd1));
302 }
303 else if (sbool)
304 {
305 nops = 2;
306 op1 = GEN_INT (TYPE_VECTOR_SUBPARTS (TREE_TYPE (oprnd0)).to_constant ());
307 tmode1 = tmode0;
308 }
309
310 /* The last operand is of a wider mode than the rest of the operands. */
311 if (nops == 2)
312 wmode = tmode1;
313 else if (nops == 3)
314 {
315 gcc_assert (tmode1 == tmode0);
316 gcc_assert (op1);
317 oprnd2 = ops->op2;
318 wmode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (oprnd2));
319 }
320
321 op = 0;
322 create_output_operand (&eops[op++], target, TYPE_MODE (ops->type));
323 create_convert_operand_from (&eops[op++], op0, tmode0, unsignedp);
324 if (op1)
325 create_convert_operand_from (&eops[op++], op1, tmode1, unsignedp);
326 if (wide_op)
327 create_convert_operand_from (&eops[op++], wide_op, wmode, unsignedp);
328 expand_insn (icode, op, eops);
329 return eops[0].value;
330 }
331
332 /* Generate code to perform an operation specified by TERNARY_OPTAB
333 on operands OP0, OP1 and OP2, with result having machine-mode MODE.
334
335 UNSIGNEDP is for the case where we have to widen the operands
336 to perform the operation. It says to use zero-extension.
337
338 If TARGET is nonzero, the value
339 is generated there, if it is convenient to do so.
340 In all cases an rtx is returned for the locus of the value;
341 this may or may not be TARGET. */
342
343 rtx
expand_ternary_op(machine_mode mode,optab ternary_optab,rtx op0,rtx op1,rtx op2,rtx target,int unsignedp)344 expand_ternary_op (machine_mode mode, optab ternary_optab, rtx op0,
345 rtx op1, rtx op2, rtx target, int unsignedp)
346 {
347 class expand_operand ops[4];
348 enum insn_code icode = optab_handler (ternary_optab, mode);
349
350 gcc_assert (optab_handler (ternary_optab, mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing);
351
352 create_output_operand (&ops[0], target, mode);
353 create_convert_operand_from (&ops[1], op0, mode, unsignedp);
354 create_convert_operand_from (&ops[2], op1, mode, unsignedp);
355 create_convert_operand_from (&ops[3], op2, mode, unsignedp);
356 expand_insn (icode, 4, ops);
357 return ops[0].value;
358 }
359
360
361 /* Like expand_binop, but return a constant rtx if the result can be
362 calculated at compile time. The arguments and return value are
363 otherwise the same as for expand_binop. */
364
365 rtx
simplify_expand_binop(machine_mode mode,optab binoptab,rtx op0,rtx op1,rtx target,int unsignedp,enum optab_methods methods)366 simplify_expand_binop (machine_mode mode, optab binoptab,
367 rtx op0, rtx op1, rtx target, int unsignedp,
368 enum optab_methods methods)
369 {
370 if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && CONSTANT_P (op1))
371 {
372 rtx x = simplify_binary_operation (optab_to_code (binoptab),
373 mode, op0, op1);
374 if (x)
375 return x;
376 }
377
378 return expand_binop (mode, binoptab, op0, op1, target, unsignedp, methods);
379 }
380
381 /* Like simplify_expand_binop, but always put the result in TARGET.
382 Return true if the expansion succeeded. */
383
384 bool
force_expand_binop(machine_mode mode,optab binoptab,rtx op0,rtx op1,rtx target,int unsignedp,enum optab_methods methods)385 force_expand_binop (machine_mode mode, optab binoptab,
386 rtx op0, rtx op1, rtx target, int unsignedp,
387 enum optab_methods methods)
388 {
389 rtx x = simplify_expand_binop (mode, binoptab, op0, op1,
390 target, unsignedp, methods);
391 if (x == 0)
392 return false;
393 if (x != target)
394 emit_move_insn (target, x);
395 return true;
396 }
397
398 /* Create a new vector value in VMODE with all elements set to OP. The
399 mode of OP must be the element mode of VMODE. If OP is a constant,
400 then the return value will be a constant. */
401
402 rtx
expand_vector_broadcast(machine_mode vmode,rtx op)403 expand_vector_broadcast (machine_mode vmode, rtx op)
404 {
405 int n;
406 rtvec vec;
407
408 gcc_checking_assert (VECTOR_MODE_P (vmode));
409
410 if (valid_for_const_vector_p (vmode, op))
411 return gen_const_vec_duplicate (vmode, op);
412
413 insn_code icode = optab_handler (vec_duplicate_optab, vmode);
414 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
415 {
416 class expand_operand ops[2];
417 create_output_operand (&ops[0], NULL_RTX, vmode);
418 create_input_operand (&ops[1], op, GET_MODE (op));
419 expand_insn (icode, 2, ops);
420 return ops[0].value;
421 }
422
423 if (!GET_MODE_NUNITS (vmode).is_constant (&n))
424 return NULL;
425
426 /* ??? If the target doesn't have a vec_init, then we have no easy way
427 of performing this operation. Most of this sort of generic support
428 is hidden away in the vector lowering support in gimple. */
429 icode = convert_optab_handler (vec_init_optab, vmode,
430 GET_MODE_INNER (vmode));
431 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing)
432 return NULL;
433
434 vec = rtvec_alloc (n);
435 for (int i = 0; i < n; ++i)
436 RTVEC_ELT (vec, i) = op;
437 rtx ret = gen_reg_rtx (vmode);
438 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (icode) (ret, gen_rtx_PARALLEL (vmode, vec)));
439
440 return ret;
441 }
442
443 /* This subroutine of expand_doubleword_shift handles the cases in which
444 the effective shift value is >= BITS_PER_WORD. The arguments and return
445 value are the same as for the parent routine, except that SUPERWORD_OP1
446 is the shift count to use when shifting OUTOF_INPUT into INTO_TARGET.
447 INTO_TARGET may be null if the caller has decided to calculate it. */
448
449 static bool
expand_superword_shift(optab binoptab,rtx outof_input,rtx superword_op1,rtx outof_target,rtx into_target,int unsignedp,enum optab_methods methods)450 expand_superword_shift (optab binoptab, rtx outof_input, rtx superword_op1,
451 rtx outof_target, rtx into_target,
452 int unsignedp, enum optab_methods methods)
453 {
454 if (into_target != 0)
455 if (!force_expand_binop (word_mode, binoptab, outof_input, superword_op1,
456 into_target, unsignedp, methods))
457 return false;
458
459 if (outof_target != 0)
460 {
461 /* For a signed right shift, we must fill OUTOF_TARGET with copies
462 of the sign bit, otherwise we must fill it with zeros. */
463 if (binoptab != ashr_optab)
464 emit_move_insn (outof_target, CONST0_RTX (word_mode));
465 else
466 if (!force_expand_binop (word_mode, binoptab, outof_input,
467 gen_int_shift_amount (word_mode,
468 BITS_PER_WORD - 1),
469 outof_target, unsignedp, methods))
470 return false;
471 }
472 return true;
473 }
474
475 /* This subroutine of expand_doubleword_shift handles the cases in which
476 the effective shift value is < BITS_PER_WORD. The arguments and return
477 value are the same as for the parent routine. */
478
479 static bool
expand_subword_shift(scalar_int_mode op1_mode,optab binoptab,rtx outof_input,rtx into_input,rtx op1,rtx outof_target,rtx into_target,int unsignedp,enum optab_methods methods,unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT shift_mask)480 expand_subword_shift (scalar_int_mode op1_mode, optab binoptab,
481 rtx outof_input, rtx into_input, rtx op1,
482 rtx outof_target, rtx into_target,
483 int unsignedp, enum optab_methods methods,
484 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT shift_mask)
485 {
486 optab reverse_unsigned_shift, unsigned_shift;
487 rtx tmp, carries;
488
489 reverse_unsigned_shift = (binoptab == ashl_optab ? lshr_optab : ashl_optab);
490 unsigned_shift = (binoptab == ashl_optab ? ashl_optab : lshr_optab);
491
492 /* The low OP1 bits of INTO_TARGET come from the high bits of OUTOF_INPUT.
493 We therefore need to shift OUTOF_INPUT by (BITS_PER_WORD - OP1) bits in
494 the opposite direction to BINOPTAB. */
495 if (CONSTANT_P (op1) || shift_mask >= BITS_PER_WORD)
496 {
497 carries = outof_input;
498 tmp = immed_wide_int_const (wi::shwi (BITS_PER_WORD,
499 op1_mode), op1_mode);
500 tmp = simplify_expand_binop (op1_mode, sub_optab, tmp, op1,
501 0, true, methods);
502 }
503 else
504 {
505 /* We must avoid shifting by BITS_PER_WORD bits since that is either
506 the same as a zero shift (if shift_mask == BITS_PER_WORD - 1) or
507 has unknown behavior. Do a single shift first, then shift by the
508 remainder. It's OK to use ~OP1 as the remainder if shift counts
509 are truncated to the mode size. */
510 carries = expand_binop (word_mode, reverse_unsigned_shift,
511 outof_input, const1_rtx, 0, unsignedp, methods);
512 if (shift_mask == BITS_PER_WORD - 1)
513 {
514 tmp = immed_wide_int_const
515 (wi::minus_one (GET_MODE_PRECISION (op1_mode)), op1_mode);
516 tmp = simplify_expand_binop (op1_mode, xor_optab, op1, tmp,
517 0, true, methods);
518 }
519 else
520 {
521 tmp = immed_wide_int_const (wi::shwi (BITS_PER_WORD - 1,
522 op1_mode), op1_mode);
523 tmp = simplify_expand_binop (op1_mode, sub_optab, tmp, op1,
524 0, true, methods);
525 }
526 }
527 if (tmp == 0 || carries == 0)
528 return false;
529 carries = expand_binop (word_mode, reverse_unsigned_shift,
530 carries, tmp, 0, unsignedp, methods);
531 if (carries == 0)
532 return false;
533
534 /* Shift INTO_INPUT logically by OP1. This is the last use of INTO_INPUT
535 so the result can go directly into INTO_TARGET if convenient. */
536 tmp = expand_binop (word_mode, unsigned_shift, into_input, op1,
537 into_target, unsignedp, methods);
538 if (tmp == 0)
539 return false;
540
541 /* Now OR in the bits carried over from OUTOF_INPUT. */
542 if (!force_expand_binop (word_mode, ior_optab, tmp, carries,
543 into_target, unsignedp, methods))
544 return false;
545
546 /* Use a standard word_mode shift for the out-of half. */
547 if (outof_target != 0)
548 if (!force_expand_binop (word_mode, binoptab, outof_input, op1,
549 outof_target, unsignedp, methods))
550 return false;
551
552 return true;
553 }
554
555
556 /* Try implementing expand_doubleword_shift using conditional moves.
557 The shift is by < BITS_PER_WORD if (CMP_CODE CMP1 CMP2) is true,
558 otherwise it is by >= BITS_PER_WORD. SUBWORD_OP1 and SUPERWORD_OP1
559 are the shift counts to use in the former and latter case. All other
560 arguments are the same as the parent routine. */
561
562 static bool
expand_doubleword_shift_condmove(scalar_int_mode op1_mode,optab binoptab,enum rtx_code cmp_code,rtx cmp1,rtx cmp2,rtx outof_input,rtx into_input,rtx subword_op1,rtx superword_op1,rtx outof_target,rtx into_target,int unsignedp,enum optab_methods methods,unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT shift_mask)563 expand_doubleword_shift_condmove (scalar_int_mode op1_mode, optab binoptab,
564 enum rtx_code cmp_code, rtx cmp1, rtx cmp2,
565 rtx outof_input, rtx into_input,
566 rtx subword_op1, rtx superword_op1,
567 rtx outof_target, rtx into_target,
568 int unsignedp, enum optab_methods methods,
569 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT shift_mask)
570 {
571 rtx outof_superword, into_superword;
572
573 /* Put the superword version of the output into OUTOF_SUPERWORD and
574 INTO_SUPERWORD. */
575 outof_superword = outof_target != 0 ? gen_reg_rtx (word_mode) : 0;
576 if (outof_target != 0 && subword_op1 == superword_op1)
577 {
578 /* The value INTO_TARGET >> SUBWORD_OP1, which we later store in
579 OUTOF_TARGET, is the same as the value of INTO_SUPERWORD. */
580 into_superword = outof_target;
581 if (!expand_superword_shift (binoptab, outof_input, superword_op1,
582 outof_superword, 0, unsignedp, methods))
583 return false;
584 }
585 else
586 {
587 into_superword = gen_reg_rtx (word_mode);
588 if (!expand_superword_shift (binoptab, outof_input, superword_op1,
589 outof_superword, into_superword,
590 unsignedp, methods))
591 return false;
592 }
593
594 /* Put the subword version directly in OUTOF_TARGET and INTO_TARGET. */
595 if (!expand_subword_shift (op1_mode, binoptab,
596 outof_input, into_input, subword_op1,
597 outof_target, into_target,
598 unsignedp, methods, shift_mask))
599 return false;
600
601 /* Select between them. Do the INTO half first because INTO_SUPERWORD
602 might be the current value of OUTOF_TARGET. */
603 if (!emit_conditional_move (into_target, cmp_code, cmp1, cmp2, op1_mode,
604 into_target, into_superword, word_mode, false))
605 return false;
606
607 if (outof_target != 0)
608 if (!emit_conditional_move (outof_target, cmp_code, cmp1, cmp2, op1_mode,
609 outof_target, outof_superword,
610 word_mode, false))
611 return false;
612
613 return true;
614 }
615
616 /* Expand a doubleword shift (ashl, ashr or lshr) using word-mode shifts.
617 OUTOF_INPUT and INTO_INPUT are the two word-sized halves of the first
618 input operand; the shift moves bits in the direction OUTOF_INPUT->
619 INTO_TARGET. OUTOF_TARGET and INTO_TARGET are the equivalent words
620 of the target. OP1 is the shift count and OP1_MODE is its mode.
621 If OP1 is constant, it will have been truncated as appropriate
622 and is known to be nonzero.
623
624 If SHIFT_MASK is zero, the result of word shifts is undefined when the
625 shift count is outside the range [0, BITS_PER_WORD). This routine must
626 avoid generating such shifts for OP1s in the range [0, BITS_PER_WORD * 2).
627
628 If SHIFT_MASK is nonzero, all word-mode shift counts are effectively
629 masked by it and shifts in the range [BITS_PER_WORD, SHIFT_MASK) will
630 fill with zeros or sign bits as appropriate.
631
632 If SHIFT_MASK is BITS_PER_WORD - 1, this routine will synthesize
633 a doubleword shift whose equivalent mask is BITS_PER_WORD * 2 - 1.
634 Doing this preserves semantics required by SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED.
635 In all other cases, shifts by values outside [0, BITS_PER_UNIT * 2)
636 are undefined.
637
638 BINOPTAB, UNSIGNEDP and METHODS are as for expand_binop. This function
639 may not use INTO_INPUT after modifying INTO_TARGET, and similarly for
640 OUTOF_INPUT and OUTOF_TARGET. OUTOF_TARGET can be null if the parent
641 function wants to calculate it itself.
642
643 Return true if the shift could be successfully synthesized. */
644
645 static bool
expand_doubleword_shift(scalar_int_mode op1_mode,optab binoptab,rtx outof_input,rtx into_input,rtx op1,rtx outof_target,rtx into_target,int unsignedp,enum optab_methods methods,unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT shift_mask)646 expand_doubleword_shift (scalar_int_mode op1_mode, optab binoptab,
647 rtx outof_input, rtx into_input, rtx op1,
648 rtx outof_target, rtx into_target,
649 int unsignedp, enum optab_methods methods,
650 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT shift_mask)
651 {
652 rtx superword_op1, tmp, cmp1, cmp2;
653 enum rtx_code cmp_code;
654
655 /* See if word-mode shifts by BITS_PER_WORD...BITS_PER_WORD * 2 - 1 will
656 fill the result with sign or zero bits as appropriate. If so, the value
657 of OUTOF_TARGET will always be (SHIFT OUTOF_INPUT OP1). Recursively call
658 this routine to calculate INTO_TARGET (which depends on both OUTOF_INPUT
659 and INTO_INPUT), then emit code to set up OUTOF_TARGET.
660
661 This isn't worthwhile for constant shifts since the optimizers will
662 cope better with in-range shift counts. */
663 if (shift_mask >= BITS_PER_WORD
664 && outof_target != 0
665 && !CONSTANT_P (op1))
666 {
667 if (!expand_doubleword_shift (op1_mode, binoptab,
668 outof_input, into_input, op1,
669 0, into_target,
670 unsignedp, methods, shift_mask))
671 return false;
672 if (!force_expand_binop (word_mode, binoptab, outof_input, op1,
673 outof_target, unsignedp, methods))
674 return false;
675 return true;
676 }
677
678 /* Set CMP_CODE, CMP1 and CMP2 so that the rtx (CMP_CODE CMP1 CMP2)
679 is true when the effective shift value is less than BITS_PER_WORD.
680 Set SUPERWORD_OP1 to the shift count that should be used to shift
681 OUTOF_INPUT into INTO_TARGET when the condition is false. */
682 tmp = immed_wide_int_const (wi::shwi (BITS_PER_WORD, op1_mode), op1_mode);
683 if (!CONSTANT_P (op1) && shift_mask == BITS_PER_WORD - 1)
684 {
685 /* Set CMP1 to OP1 & BITS_PER_WORD. The result is zero iff OP1
686 is a subword shift count. */
687 cmp1 = simplify_expand_binop (op1_mode, and_optab, op1, tmp,
688 0, true, methods);
689 cmp2 = CONST0_RTX (op1_mode);
690 cmp_code = EQ;
691 superword_op1 = op1;
692 }
693 else
694 {
695 /* Set CMP1 to OP1 - BITS_PER_WORD. */
696 cmp1 = simplify_expand_binop (op1_mode, sub_optab, op1, tmp,
697 0, true, methods);
698 cmp2 = CONST0_RTX (op1_mode);
699 cmp_code = LT;
700 superword_op1 = cmp1;
701 }
702 if (cmp1 == 0)
703 return false;
704
705 /* If we can compute the condition at compile time, pick the
706 appropriate subroutine. */
707 tmp = simplify_relational_operation (cmp_code, SImode, op1_mode, cmp1, cmp2);
708 if (tmp != 0 && CONST_INT_P (tmp))
709 {
710 if (tmp == const0_rtx)
711 return expand_superword_shift (binoptab, outof_input, superword_op1,
712 outof_target, into_target,
713 unsignedp, methods);
714 else
715 return expand_subword_shift (op1_mode, binoptab,
716 outof_input, into_input, op1,
717 outof_target, into_target,
718 unsignedp, methods, shift_mask);
719 }
720
721 /* Try using conditional moves to generate straight-line code. */
722 if (HAVE_conditional_move)
723 {
724 rtx_insn *start = get_last_insn ();
725 if (expand_doubleword_shift_condmove (op1_mode, binoptab,
726 cmp_code, cmp1, cmp2,
727 outof_input, into_input,
728 op1, superword_op1,
729 outof_target, into_target,
730 unsignedp, methods, shift_mask))
731 return true;
732 delete_insns_since (start);
733 }
734
735 /* As a last resort, use branches to select the correct alternative. */
736 rtx_code_label *subword_label = gen_label_rtx ();
737 rtx_code_label *done_label = gen_label_rtx ();
738
739 NO_DEFER_POP;
740 do_compare_rtx_and_jump (cmp1, cmp2, cmp_code, false, op1_mode,
741 0, 0, subword_label,
742 profile_probability::uninitialized ());
743 OK_DEFER_POP;
744
745 if (!expand_superword_shift (binoptab, outof_input, superword_op1,
746 outof_target, into_target,
747 unsignedp, methods))
748 return false;
749
750 emit_jump_insn (targetm.gen_jump (done_label));
751 emit_barrier ();
752 emit_label (subword_label);
753
754 if (!expand_subword_shift (op1_mode, binoptab,
755 outof_input, into_input, op1,
756 outof_target, into_target,
757 unsignedp, methods, shift_mask))
758 return false;
759
760 emit_label (done_label);
761 return true;
762 }
763
764 /* Subroutine of expand_binop. Perform a double word multiplication of
765 operands OP0 and OP1 both of mode MODE, which is exactly twice as wide
766 as the target's word_mode. This function return NULL_RTX if anything
767 goes wrong, in which case it may have already emitted instructions
768 which need to be deleted.
769
770 If we want to multiply two two-word values and have normal and widening
771 multiplies of single-word values, we can do this with three smaller
772 multiplications.
773
774 The multiplication proceeds as follows:
775 _______________________
776 [__op0_high_|__op0_low__]
777 _______________________
778 * [__op1_high_|__op1_low__]
779 _______________________________________________
780 _______________________
781 (1) [__op0_low__*__op1_low__]
782 _______________________
783 (2a) [__op0_low__*__op1_high_]
784 _______________________
785 (2b) [__op0_high_*__op1_low__]
786 _______________________
787 (3) [__op0_high_*__op1_high_]
788
789
790 This gives a 4-word result. Since we are only interested in the
791 lower 2 words, partial result (3) and the upper words of (2a) and
792 (2b) don't need to be calculated. Hence (2a) and (2b) can be
793 calculated using non-widening multiplication.
794
795 (1), however, needs to be calculated with an unsigned widening
796 multiplication. If this operation is not directly supported we
797 try using a signed widening multiplication and adjust the result.
798 This adjustment works as follows:
799
800 If both operands are positive then no adjustment is needed.
801
802 If the operands have different signs, for example op0_low < 0 and
803 op1_low >= 0, the instruction treats the most significant bit of
804 op0_low as a sign bit instead of a bit with significance
805 2**(BITS_PER_WORD-1), i.e. the instruction multiplies op1_low
806 with 2**BITS_PER_WORD - op0_low, and two's complements the
807 result. Conclusion: We need to add op1_low * 2**BITS_PER_WORD to
808 the result.
809
810 Similarly, if both operands are negative, we need to add
811 (op0_low + op1_low) * 2**BITS_PER_WORD.
812
813 We use a trick to adjust quickly. We logically shift op0_low right
814 (op1_low) BITS_PER_WORD-1 steps to get 0 or 1, and add this to
815 op0_high (op1_high) before it is used to calculate 2b (2a). If no
816 logical shift exists, we do an arithmetic right shift and subtract
817 the 0 or -1. */
818
819 static rtx
expand_doubleword_mult(machine_mode mode,rtx op0,rtx op1,rtx target,bool umulp,enum optab_methods methods)820 expand_doubleword_mult (machine_mode mode, rtx op0, rtx op1, rtx target,
821 bool umulp, enum optab_methods methods)
822 {
823 int low = (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN ? 1 : 0);
824 int high = (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN ? 0 : 1);
825 rtx wordm1 = (umulp ? NULL_RTX
826 : gen_int_shift_amount (word_mode, BITS_PER_WORD - 1));
827 rtx product, adjust, product_high, temp;
828
829 rtx op0_high = operand_subword_force (op0, high, mode);
830 rtx op0_low = operand_subword_force (op0, low, mode);
831 rtx op1_high = operand_subword_force (op1, high, mode);
832 rtx op1_low = operand_subword_force (op1, low, mode);
833
834 /* If we're using an unsigned multiply to directly compute the product
835 of the low-order words of the operands and perform any required
836 adjustments of the operands, we begin by trying two more multiplications
837 and then computing the appropriate sum.
838
839 We have checked above that the required addition is provided.
840 Full-word addition will normally always succeed, especially if
841 it is provided at all, so we don't worry about its failure. The
842 multiplication may well fail, however, so we do handle that. */
843
844 if (!umulp)
845 {
846 /* ??? This could be done with emit_store_flag where available. */
847 temp = expand_binop (word_mode, lshr_optab, op0_low, wordm1,
848 NULL_RTX, 1, methods);
849 if (temp)
850 op0_high = expand_binop (word_mode, add_optab, op0_high, temp,
851 NULL_RTX, 0, OPTAB_DIRECT);
852 else
853 {
854 temp = expand_binop (word_mode, ashr_optab, op0_low, wordm1,
855 NULL_RTX, 0, methods);
856 if (!temp)
857 return NULL_RTX;
858 op0_high = expand_binop (word_mode, sub_optab, op0_high, temp,
859 NULL_RTX, 0, OPTAB_DIRECT);
860 }
861
862 if (!op0_high)
863 return NULL_RTX;
864 }
865
866 adjust = expand_binop (word_mode, smul_optab, op0_high, op1_low,
867 NULL_RTX, 0, OPTAB_DIRECT);
868 if (!adjust)
869 return NULL_RTX;
870
871 /* OP0_HIGH should now be dead. */
872
873 if (!umulp)
874 {
875 /* ??? This could be done with emit_store_flag where available. */
876 temp = expand_binop (word_mode, lshr_optab, op1_low, wordm1,
877 NULL_RTX, 1, methods);
878 if (temp)
879 op1_high = expand_binop (word_mode, add_optab, op1_high, temp,
880 NULL_RTX, 0, OPTAB_DIRECT);
881 else
882 {
883 temp = expand_binop (word_mode, ashr_optab, op1_low, wordm1,
884 NULL_RTX, 0, methods);
885 if (!temp)
886 return NULL_RTX;
887 op1_high = expand_binop (word_mode, sub_optab, op1_high, temp,
888 NULL_RTX, 0, OPTAB_DIRECT);
889 }
890
891 if (!op1_high)
892 return NULL_RTX;
893 }
894
895 temp = expand_binop (word_mode, smul_optab, op1_high, op0_low,
896 NULL_RTX, 0, OPTAB_DIRECT);
897 if (!temp)
898 return NULL_RTX;
899
900 /* OP1_HIGH should now be dead. */
901
902 adjust = expand_binop (word_mode, add_optab, adjust, temp,
903 NULL_RTX, 0, OPTAB_DIRECT);
904
905 if (target && !REG_P (target))
906 target = NULL_RTX;
907
908 /* *_widen_optab needs to determine operand mode, make sure at least
909 one operand has non-VOID mode. */
910 if (GET_MODE (op0_low) == VOIDmode && GET_MODE (op1_low) == VOIDmode)
911 op0_low = force_reg (word_mode, op0_low);
912
913 if (umulp)
914 product = expand_binop (mode, umul_widen_optab, op0_low, op1_low,
915 target, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT);
916 else
917 product = expand_binop (mode, smul_widen_optab, op0_low, op1_low,
918 target, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT);
919
920 if (!product)
921 return NULL_RTX;
922
923 product_high = operand_subword (product, high, 1, mode);
924 adjust = expand_binop (word_mode, add_optab, product_high, adjust,
925 NULL_RTX, 0, OPTAB_DIRECT);
926 emit_move_insn (product_high, adjust);
927 return product;
928 }
929
930 /* Wrapper around expand_binop which takes an rtx code to specify
931 the operation to perform, not an optab pointer. All other
932 arguments are the same. */
933 rtx
expand_simple_binop(machine_mode mode,enum rtx_code code,rtx op0,rtx op1,rtx target,int unsignedp,enum optab_methods methods)934 expand_simple_binop (machine_mode mode, enum rtx_code code, rtx op0,
935 rtx op1, rtx target, int unsignedp,
936 enum optab_methods methods)
937 {
938 optab binop = code_to_optab (code);
939 gcc_assert (binop);
940
941 return expand_binop (mode, binop, op0, op1, target, unsignedp, methods);
942 }
943
944 /* Return whether OP0 and OP1 should be swapped when expanding a commutative
945 binop. Order them according to commutative_operand_precedence and, if
946 possible, try to put TARGET or a pseudo first. */
947 static bool
swap_commutative_operands_with_target(rtx target,rtx op0,rtx op1)948 swap_commutative_operands_with_target (rtx target, rtx op0, rtx op1)
949 {
950 int op0_prec = commutative_operand_precedence (op0);
951 int op1_prec = commutative_operand_precedence (op1);
952
953 if (op0_prec < op1_prec)
954 return true;
955
956 if (op0_prec > op1_prec)
957 return false;
958
959 /* With equal precedence, both orders are ok, but it is better if the
960 first operand is TARGET, or if both TARGET and OP0 are pseudos. */
961 if (target == 0 || REG_P (target))
962 return (REG_P (op1) && !REG_P (op0)) || target == op1;
963 else
964 return rtx_equal_p (op1, target);
965 }
966
967 /* Return true if BINOPTAB implements a shift operation. */
968
969 static bool
shift_optab_p(optab binoptab)970 shift_optab_p (optab binoptab)
971 {
972 switch (optab_to_code (binoptab))
973 {
974 case ASHIFT:
975 case SS_ASHIFT:
976 case US_ASHIFT:
977 case ASHIFTRT:
978 case LSHIFTRT:
979 case ROTATE:
980 case ROTATERT:
981 return true;
982
983 default:
984 return false;
985 }
986 }
987
988 /* Return true if BINOPTAB implements a commutative binary operation. */
989
990 static bool
commutative_optab_p(optab binoptab)991 commutative_optab_p (optab binoptab)
992 {
993 return (GET_RTX_CLASS (optab_to_code (binoptab)) == RTX_COMM_ARITH
994 || binoptab == smul_widen_optab
995 || binoptab == umul_widen_optab
996 || binoptab == smul_highpart_optab
997 || binoptab == umul_highpart_optab);
998 }
999
1000 /* X is to be used in mode MODE as operand OPN to BINOPTAB. If we're
1001 optimizing, and if the operand is a constant that costs more than
1002 1 instruction, force the constant into a register and return that
1003 register. Return X otherwise. UNSIGNEDP says whether X is unsigned. */
1004
1005 static rtx
avoid_expensive_constant(machine_mode mode,optab binoptab,int opn,rtx x,bool unsignedp)1006 avoid_expensive_constant (machine_mode mode, optab binoptab,
1007 int opn, rtx x, bool unsignedp)
1008 {
1009 bool speed = optimize_insn_for_speed_p ();
1010
1011 if (mode != VOIDmode
1012 && optimize
1013 && CONSTANT_P (x)
1014 && (rtx_cost (x, mode, optab_to_code (binoptab), opn, speed)
1015 > set_src_cost (x, mode, speed)))
1016 {
1017 if (CONST_INT_P (x))
1018 {
1019 HOST_WIDE_INT intval = trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (x), mode);
1020 if (intval != INTVAL (x))
1021 x = GEN_INT (intval);
1022 }
1023 else
1024 x = convert_modes (mode, VOIDmode, x, unsignedp);
1025 x = force_reg (mode, x);
1026 }
1027 return x;
1028 }
1029
1030 /* Helper function for expand_binop: handle the case where there
1031 is an insn ICODE that directly implements the indicated operation.
1032 Returns null if this is not possible. */
1033 static rtx
expand_binop_directly(enum insn_code icode,machine_mode mode,optab binoptab,rtx op0,rtx op1,rtx target,int unsignedp,enum optab_methods methods,rtx_insn * last)1034 expand_binop_directly (enum insn_code icode, machine_mode mode, optab binoptab,
1035 rtx op0, rtx op1,
1036 rtx target, int unsignedp, enum optab_methods methods,
1037 rtx_insn *last)
1038 {
1039 machine_mode xmode0 = insn_data[(int) icode].operand[1].mode;
1040 machine_mode xmode1 = insn_data[(int) icode].operand[2].mode;
1041 machine_mode mode0, mode1, tmp_mode;
1042 class expand_operand ops[3];
1043 bool commutative_p;
1044 rtx_insn *pat;
1045 rtx xop0 = op0, xop1 = op1;
1046 bool canonicalize_op1 = false;
1047
1048 /* If it is a commutative operator and the modes would match
1049 if we would swap the operands, we can save the conversions. */
1050 commutative_p = commutative_optab_p (binoptab);
1051 if (commutative_p
1052 && GET_MODE (xop0) != xmode0 && GET_MODE (xop1) != xmode1
1053 && GET_MODE (xop0) == xmode1 && GET_MODE (xop1) == xmode0)
1054 std::swap (xop0, xop1);
1055
1056 /* If we are optimizing, force expensive constants into a register. */
1057 xop0 = avoid_expensive_constant (xmode0, binoptab, 0, xop0, unsignedp);
1058 if (!shift_optab_p (binoptab))
1059 xop1 = avoid_expensive_constant (xmode1, binoptab, 1, xop1, unsignedp);
1060 else
1061 /* Shifts and rotates often use a different mode for op1 from op0;
1062 for VOIDmode constants we don't know the mode, so force it
1063 to be canonicalized using convert_modes. */
1064 canonicalize_op1 = true;
1065
1066 /* In case the insn wants input operands in modes different from
1067 those of the actual operands, convert the operands. It would
1068 seem that we don't need to convert CONST_INTs, but we do, so
1069 that they're properly zero-extended, sign-extended or truncated
1070 for their mode. */
1071
1072 mode0 = GET_MODE (xop0) != VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (xop0) : mode;
1073 if (xmode0 != VOIDmode && xmode0 != mode0)
1074 {
1075 xop0 = convert_modes (xmode0, mode0, xop0, unsignedp);
1076 mode0 = xmode0;
1077 }
1078
1079 mode1 = ((GET_MODE (xop1) != VOIDmode || canonicalize_op1)
1080 ? GET_MODE (xop1) : mode);
1081 if (xmode1 != VOIDmode && xmode1 != mode1)
1082 {
1083 xop1 = convert_modes (xmode1, mode1, xop1, unsignedp);
1084 mode1 = xmode1;
1085 }
1086
1087 /* If operation is commutative,
1088 try to make the first operand a register.
1089 Even better, try to make it the same as the target.
1090 Also try to make the last operand a constant. */
1091 if (commutative_p
1092 && swap_commutative_operands_with_target (target, xop0, xop1))
1093 std::swap (xop0, xop1);
1094
1095 /* Now, if insn's predicates don't allow our operands, put them into
1096 pseudo regs. */
1097
1098 if (binoptab == vec_pack_trunc_optab
1099 || binoptab == vec_pack_usat_optab
1100 || binoptab == vec_pack_ssat_optab
1101 || binoptab == vec_pack_ufix_trunc_optab
1102 || binoptab == vec_pack_sfix_trunc_optab
1103 || binoptab == vec_packu_float_optab
1104 || binoptab == vec_packs_float_optab)
1105 {
1106 /* The mode of the result is different then the mode of the
1107 arguments. */
1108 tmp_mode = insn_data[(int) icode].operand[0].mode;
1109 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (mode)
1110 && maybe_ne (GET_MODE_NUNITS (tmp_mode), 2 * GET_MODE_NUNITS (mode)))
1111 {
1112 delete_insns_since (last);
1113 return NULL_RTX;
1114 }
1115 }
1116 else
1117 tmp_mode = mode;
1118
1119 create_output_operand (&ops[0], target, tmp_mode);
1120 create_input_operand (&ops[1], xop0, mode0);
1121 create_input_operand (&ops[2], xop1, mode1);
1122 pat = maybe_gen_insn (icode, 3, ops);
1123 if (pat)
1124 {
1125 /* If PAT is composed of more than one insn, try to add an appropriate
1126 REG_EQUAL note to it. If we can't because TEMP conflicts with an
1127 operand, call expand_binop again, this time without a target. */
1128 if (INSN_P (pat) && NEXT_INSN (pat) != NULL_RTX
1129 && ! add_equal_note (pat, ops[0].value,
1130 optab_to_code (binoptab),
1131 ops[1].value, ops[2].value, mode0))
1132 {
1133 delete_insns_since (last);
1134 return expand_binop (mode, binoptab, op0, op1, NULL_RTX,
1135 unsignedp, methods);
1136 }
1137
1138 emit_insn (pat);
1139 return ops[0].value;
1140 }
1141 delete_insns_since (last);
1142 return NULL_RTX;
1143 }
1144
1145 /* Generate code to perform an operation specified by BINOPTAB
1146 on operands OP0 and OP1, with result having machine-mode MODE.
1147
1148 UNSIGNEDP is for the case where we have to widen the operands
1149 to perform the operation. It says to use zero-extension.
1150
1151 If TARGET is nonzero, the value
1152 is generated there, if it is convenient to do so.
1153 In all cases an rtx is returned for the locus of the value;
1154 this may or may not be TARGET. */
1155
1156 rtx
expand_binop(machine_mode mode,optab binoptab,rtx op0,rtx op1,rtx target,int unsignedp,enum optab_methods methods)1157 expand_binop (machine_mode mode, optab binoptab, rtx op0, rtx op1,
1158 rtx target, int unsignedp, enum optab_methods methods)
1159 {
1160 enum optab_methods next_methods
1161 = (methods == OPTAB_LIB || methods == OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
1162 ? OPTAB_WIDEN : methods);
1163 enum mode_class mclass;
1164 enum insn_code icode;
1165 machine_mode wider_mode;
1166 scalar_int_mode int_mode;
1167 rtx libfunc;
1168 rtx temp;
1169 rtx_insn *entry_last = get_last_insn ();
1170 rtx_insn *last;
1171
1172 mclass = GET_MODE_CLASS (mode);
1173
1174 /* If subtracting an integer constant, convert this into an addition of
1175 the negated constant. */
1176
1177 if (binoptab == sub_optab && CONST_INT_P (op1))
1178 {
1179 op1 = negate_rtx (mode, op1);
1180 binoptab = add_optab;
1181 }
1182 /* For shifts, constant invalid op1 might be expanded from different
1183 mode than MODE. As those are invalid, force them to a register
1184 to avoid further problems during expansion. */
1185 else if (CONST_INT_P (op1)
1186 && shift_optab_p (binoptab)
1187 && UINTVAL (op1) >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE_INNER (mode)))
1188 {
1189 op1 = gen_int_mode (INTVAL (op1), GET_MODE_INNER (mode));
1190 op1 = force_reg (GET_MODE_INNER (mode), op1);
1191 }
1192
1193 /* Record where to delete back to if we backtrack. */
1194 last = get_last_insn ();
1195
1196 /* If we can do it with a three-operand insn, do so. */
1197
1198 if (methods != OPTAB_MUST_WIDEN)
1199 {
1200 if (convert_optab_p (binoptab))
1201 {
1202 machine_mode from_mode = widened_mode (mode, op0, op1);
1203 icode = find_widening_optab_handler (binoptab, mode, from_mode);
1204 }
1205 else
1206 icode = optab_handler (binoptab, mode);
1207 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
1208 {
1209 temp = expand_binop_directly (icode, mode, binoptab, op0, op1,
1210 target, unsignedp, methods, last);
1211 if (temp)
1212 return temp;
1213 }
1214 }
1215
1216 /* If we were trying to rotate, and that didn't work, try rotating
1217 the other direction before falling back to shifts and bitwise-or. */
1218 if (((binoptab == rotl_optab
1219 && (icode = optab_handler (rotr_optab, mode)) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
1220 || (binoptab == rotr_optab
1221 && (icode = optab_handler (rotl_optab, mode)) != CODE_FOR_nothing))
1222 && is_int_mode (mode, &int_mode))
1223 {
1224 optab otheroptab = (binoptab == rotl_optab ? rotr_optab : rotl_optab);
1225 rtx newop1;
1226 unsigned int bits = GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode);
1227
1228 if (CONST_INT_P (op1))
1229 newop1 = gen_int_shift_amount (int_mode, bits - INTVAL (op1));
1230 else if (targetm.shift_truncation_mask (int_mode) == bits - 1)
1231 newop1 = negate_rtx (GET_MODE (op1), op1);
1232 else
1233 newop1 = expand_binop (GET_MODE (op1), sub_optab,
1234 gen_int_mode (bits, GET_MODE (op1)), op1,
1235 NULL_RTX, unsignedp, OPTAB_DIRECT);
1236
1237 temp = expand_binop_directly (icode, int_mode, otheroptab, op0, newop1,
1238 target, unsignedp, methods, last);
1239 if (temp)
1240 return temp;
1241 }
1242
1243 /* If this is a multiply, see if we can do a widening operation that
1244 takes operands of this mode and makes a wider mode. */
1245
1246 if (binoptab == smul_optab
1247 && GET_MODE_2XWIDER_MODE (mode).exists (&wider_mode)
1248 && (convert_optab_handler ((unsignedp
1249 ? umul_widen_optab
1250 : smul_widen_optab),
1251 wider_mode, mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing))
1252 {
1253 /* *_widen_optab needs to determine operand mode, make sure at least
1254 one operand has non-VOID mode. */
1255 if (GET_MODE (op0) == VOIDmode && GET_MODE (op1) == VOIDmode)
1256 op0 = force_reg (mode, op0);
1257 temp = expand_binop (wider_mode,
1258 unsignedp ? umul_widen_optab : smul_widen_optab,
1259 op0, op1, NULL_RTX, unsignedp, OPTAB_DIRECT);
1260
1261 if (temp != 0)
1262 {
1263 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
1264 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (mode, GET_MODE (temp)))
1265 return gen_lowpart (mode, temp);
1266 else
1267 return convert_to_mode (mode, temp, unsignedp);
1268 }
1269 }
1270
1271 /* If this is a vector shift by a scalar, see if we can do a vector
1272 shift by a vector. If so, broadcast the scalar into a vector. */
1273 if (mclass == MODE_VECTOR_INT)
1274 {
1275 optab otheroptab = unknown_optab;
1276
1277 if (binoptab == ashl_optab)
1278 otheroptab = vashl_optab;
1279 else if (binoptab == ashr_optab)
1280 otheroptab = vashr_optab;
1281 else if (binoptab == lshr_optab)
1282 otheroptab = vlshr_optab;
1283 else if (binoptab == rotl_optab)
1284 otheroptab = vrotl_optab;
1285 else if (binoptab == rotr_optab)
1286 otheroptab = vrotr_optab;
1287
1288 if (otheroptab
1289 && (icode = optab_handler (otheroptab, mode)) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
1290 {
1291 /* The scalar may have been extended to be too wide. Truncate
1292 it back to the proper size to fit in the broadcast vector. */
1293 scalar_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE_INNER (mode);
1294 if (!CONST_INT_P (op1)
1295 && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (as_a <scalar_int_mode> (GET_MODE (op1)))
1296 > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode)))
1297 op1 = force_reg (inner_mode,
1298 simplify_gen_unary (TRUNCATE, inner_mode, op1,
1299 GET_MODE (op1)));
1300 rtx vop1 = expand_vector_broadcast (mode, op1);
1301 if (vop1)
1302 {
1303 temp = expand_binop_directly (icode, mode, otheroptab, op0, vop1,
1304 target, unsignedp, methods, last);
1305 if (temp)
1306 return temp;
1307 }
1308 }
1309 }
1310
1311 /* Look for a wider mode of the same class for which we think we
1312 can open-code the operation. Check for a widening multiply at the
1313 wider mode as well. */
1314
1315 if (CLASS_HAS_WIDER_MODES_P (mclass)
1316 && methods != OPTAB_DIRECT && methods != OPTAB_LIB)
1317 FOR_EACH_WIDER_MODE (wider_mode, mode)
1318 {
1319 machine_mode next_mode;
1320 if (optab_handler (binoptab, wider_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing
1321 || (binoptab == smul_optab
1322 && GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (wider_mode).exists (&next_mode)
1323 && (find_widening_optab_handler ((unsignedp
1324 ? umul_widen_optab
1325 : smul_widen_optab),
1326 next_mode, mode)
1327 != CODE_FOR_nothing)))
1328 {
1329 rtx xop0 = op0, xop1 = op1;
1330 int no_extend = 0;
1331
1332 /* For certain integer operations, we need not actually extend
1333 the narrow operands, as long as we will truncate
1334 the results to the same narrowness. */
1335
1336 if ((binoptab == ior_optab || binoptab == and_optab
1337 || binoptab == xor_optab
1338 || binoptab == add_optab || binoptab == sub_optab
1339 || binoptab == smul_optab || binoptab == ashl_optab)
1340 && mclass == MODE_INT)
1341 {
1342 no_extend = 1;
1343 xop0 = avoid_expensive_constant (mode, binoptab, 0,
1344 xop0, unsignedp);
1345 if (binoptab != ashl_optab)
1346 xop1 = avoid_expensive_constant (mode, binoptab, 1,
1347 xop1, unsignedp);
1348 }
1349
1350 xop0 = widen_operand (xop0, wider_mode, mode, unsignedp, no_extend);
1351
1352 /* The second operand of a shift must always be extended. */
1353 xop1 = widen_operand (xop1, wider_mode, mode, unsignedp,
1354 no_extend && binoptab != ashl_optab);
1355
1356 temp = expand_binop (wider_mode, binoptab, xop0, xop1, NULL_RTX,
1357 unsignedp, OPTAB_DIRECT);
1358 if (temp)
1359 {
1360 if (mclass != MODE_INT
1361 || !TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (mode, wider_mode))
1362 {
1363 if (target == 0)
1364 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
1365 convert_move (target, temp, 0);
1366 return target;
1367 }
1368 else
1369 return gen_lowpart (mode, temp);
1370 }
1371 else
1372 delete_insns_since (last);
1373 }
1374 }
1375
1376 /* If operation is commutative,
1377 try to make the first operand a register.
1378 Even better, try to make it the same as the target.
1379 Also try to make the last operand a constant. */
1380 if (commutative_optab_p (binoptab)
1381 && swap_commutative_operands_with_target (target, op0, op1))
1382 std::swap (op0, op1);
1383
1384 /* These can be done a word at a time. */
1385 if ((binoptab == and_optab || binoptab == ior_optab || binoptab == xor_optab)
1386 && is_int_mode (mode, &int_mode)
1387 && GET_MODE_SIZE (int_mode) > UNITS_PER_WORD
1388 && optab_handler (binoptab, word_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
1389 {
1390 int i;
1391 rtx_insn *insns;
1392
1393 /* If TARGET is the same as one of the operands, the REG_EQUAL note
1394 won't be accurate, so use a new target. */
1395 if (target == 0
1396 || target == op0
1397 || target == op1
1398 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (target, op0)
1399 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (target, op1)
1400 || !valid_multiword_target_p (target))
1401 target = gen_reg_rtx (int_mode);
1402
1403 start_sequence ();
1404
1405 /* Do the actual arithmetic. */
1406 machine_mode op0_mode = GET_MODE (op0);
1407 machine_mode op1_mode = GET_MODE (op1);
1408 if (op0_mode == VOIDmode)
1409 op0_mode = int_mode;
1410 if (op1_mode == VOIDmode)
1411 op1_mode = int_mode;
1412 for (i = 0; i < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (int_mode) / BITS_PER_WORD; i++)
1413 {
1414 rtx target_piece = operand_subword (target, i, 1, int_mode);
1415 rtx x = expand_binop (word_mode, binoptab,
1416 operand_subword_force (op0, i, op0_mode),
1417 operand_subword_force (op1, i, op1_mode),
1418 target_piece, unsignedp, next_methods);
1419
1420 if (x == 0)
1421 break;
1422
1423 if (target_piece != x)
1424 emit_move_insn (target_piece, x);
1425 }
1426
1427 insns = get_insns ();
1428 end_sequence ();
1429
1430 if (i == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (int_mode) / BITS_PER_WORD)
1431 {
1432 emit_insn (insns);
1433 return target;
1434 }
1435 }
1436
1437 /* Synthesize double word shifts from single word shifts. */
1438 if ((binoptab == lshr_optab || binoptab == ashl_optab
1439 || binoptab == ashr_optab)
1440 && is_int_mode (mode, &int_mode)
1441 && (CONST_INT_P (op1) || optimize_insn_for_speed_p ())
1442 && GET_MODE_SIZE (int_mode) == 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD
1443 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode) == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (int_mode)
1444 && optab_handler (binoptab, word_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing
1445 && optab_handler (ashl_optab, word_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing
1446 && optab_handler (lshr_optab, word_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
1447 {
1448 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT shift_mask, double_shift_mask;
1449 scalar_int_mode op1_mode;
1450
1451 double_shift_mask = targetm.shift_truncation_mask (int_mode);
1452 shift_mask = targetm.shift_truncation_mask (word_mode);
1453 op1_mode = (GET_MODE (op1) != VOIDmode
1454 ? as_a <scalar_int_mode> (GET_MODE (op1))
1455 : word_mode);
1456
1457 /* Apply the truncation to constant shifts. */
1458 if (double_shift_mask > 0 && CONST_INT_P (op1))
1459 op1 = gen_int_mode (INTVAL (op1) & double_shift_mask, op1_mode);
1460
1461 if (op1 == CONST0_RTX (op1_mode))
1462 return op0;
1463
1464 /* Make sure that this is a combination that expand_doubleword_shift
1465 can handle. See the comments there for details. */
1466 if (double_shift_mask == 0
1467 || (shift_mask == BITS_PER_WORD - 1
1468 && double_shift_mask == BITS_PER_WORD * 2 - 1))
1469 {
1470 rtx_insn *insns;
1471 rtx into_target, outof_target;
1472 rtx into_input, outof_input;
1473 int left_shift, outof_word;
1474
1475 /* If TARGET is the same as one of the operands, the REG_EQUAL note
1476 won't be accurate, so use a new target. */
1477 if (target == 0
1478 || target == op0
1479 || target == op1
1480 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (target, op0)
1481 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (target, op1)
1482 || !valid_multiword_target_p (target))
1483 target = gen_reg_rtx (int_mode);
1484
1485 start_sequence ();
1486
1487 /* OUTOF_* is the word we are shifting bits away from, and
1488 INTO_* is the word that we are shifting bits towards, thus
1489 they differ depending on the direction of the shift and
1490 WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN. */
1491
1492 left_shift = binoptab == ashl_optab;
1493 outof_word = left_shift ^ ! WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN;
1494
1495 outof_target = operand_subword (target, outof_word, 1, int_mode);
1496 into_target = operand_subword (target, 1 - outof_word, 1, int_mode);
1497
1498 outof_input = operand_subword_force (op0, outof_word, int_mode);
1499 into_input = operand_subword_force (op0, 1 - outof_word, int_mode);
1500
1501 if (expand_doubleword_shift (op1_mode, binoptab,
1502 outof_input, into_input, op1,
1503 outof_target, into_target,
1504 unsignedp, next_methods, shift_mask))
1505 {
1506 insns = get_insns ();
1507 end_sequence ();
1508
1509 emit_insn (insns);
1510 return target;
1511 }
1512 end_sequence ();
1513 }
1514 }
1515
1516 /* Synthesize double word rotates from single word shifts. */
1517 if ((binoptab == rotl_optab || binoptab == rotr_optab)
1518 && is_int_mode (mode, &int_mode)
1519 && CONST_INT_P (op1)
1520 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode) == 2 * BITS_PER_WORD
1521 && optab_handler (ashl_optab, word_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing
1522 && optab_handler (lshr_optab, word_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
1523 {
1524 rtx_insn *insns;
1525 rtx into_target, outof_target;
1526 rtx into_input, outof_input;
1527 rtx inter;
1528 int shift_count, left_shift, outof_word;
1529
1530 /* If TARGET is the same as one of the operands, the REG_EQUAL note
1531 won't be accurate, so use a new target. Do this also if target is not
1532 a REG, first because having a register instead may open optimization
1533 opportunities, and second because if target and op0 happen to be MEMs
1534 designating the same location, we would risk clobbering it too early
1535 in the code sequence we generate below. */
1536 if (target == 0
1537 || target == op0
1538 || target == op1
1539 || !REG_P (target)
1540 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (target, op0)
1541 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (target, op1)
1542 || !valid_multiword_target_p (target))
1543 target = gen_reg_rtx (int_mode);
1544
1545 start_sequence ();
1546
1547 shift_count = INTVAL (op1);
1548
1549 /* OUTOF_* is the word we are shifting bits away from, and
1550 INTO_* is the word that we are shifting bits towards, thus
1551 they differ depending on the direction of the shift and
1552 WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN. */
1553
1554 left_shift = (binoptab == rotl_optab);
1555 outof_word = left_shift ^ ! WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN;
1556
1557 outof_target = operand_subword (target, outof_word, 1, int_mode);
1558 into_target = operand_subword (target, 1 - outof_word, 1, int_mode);
1559
1560 outof_input = operand_subword_force (op0, outof_word, int_mode);
1561 into_input = operand_subword_force (op0, 1 - outof_word, int_mode);
1562
1563 if (shift_count == BITS_PER_WORD)
1564 {
1565 /* This is just a word swap. */
1566 emit_move_insn (outof_target, into_input);
1567 emit_move_insn (into_target, outof_input);
1568 inter = const0_rtx;
1569 }
1570 else
1571 {
1572 rtx into_temp1, into_temp2, outof_temp1, outof_temp2;
1573 HOST_WIDE_INT first_shift_count, second_shift_count;
1574 optab reverse_unsigned_shift, unsigned_shift;
1575
1576 reverse_unsigned_shift = (left_shift ^ (shift_count < BITS_PER_WORD)
1577 ? lshr_optab : ashl_optab);
1578
1579 unsigned_shift = (left_shift ^ (shift_count < BITS_PER_WORD)
1580 ? ashl_optab : lshr_optab);
1581
1582 if (shift_count > BITS_PER_WORD)
1583 {
1584 first_shift_count = shift_count - BITS_PER_WORD;
1585 second_shift_count = 2 * BITS_PER_WORD - shift_count;
1586 }
1587 else
1588 {
1589 first_shift_count = BITS_PER_WORD - shift_count;
1590 second_shift_count = shift_count;
1591 }
1592 rtx first_shift_count_rtx
1593 = gen_int_shift_amount (word_mode, first_shift_count);
1594 rtx second_shift_count_rtx
1595 = gen_int_shift_amount (word_mode, second_shift_count);
1596
1597 into_temp1 = expand_binop (word_mode, unsigned_shift,
1598 outof_input, first_shift_count_rtx,
1599 NULL_RTX, unsignedp, next_methods);
1600 into_temp2 = expand_binop (word_mode, reverse_unsigned_shift,
1601 into_input, second_shift_count_rtx,
1602 NULL_RTX, unsignedp, next_methods);
1603
1604 if (into_temp1 != 0 && into_temp2 != 0)
1605 inter = expand_binop (word_mode, ior_optab, into_temp1, into_temp2,
1606 into_target, unsignedp, next_methods);
1607 else
1608 inter = 0;
1609
1610 if (inter != 0 && inter != into_target)
1611 emit_move_insn (into_target, inter);
1612
1613 outof_temp1 = expand_binop (word_mode, unsigned_shift,
1614 into_input, first_shift_count_rtx,
1615 NULL_RTX, unsignedp, next_methods);
1616 outof_temp2 = expand_binop (word_mode, reverse_unsigned_shift,
1617 outof_input, second_shift_count_rtx,
1618 NULL_RTX, unsignedp, next_methods);
1619
1620 if (inter != 0 && outof_temp1 != 0 && outof_temp2 != 0)
1621 inter = expand_binop (word_mode, ior_optab,
1622 outof_temp1, outof_temp2,
1623 outof_target, unsignedp, next_methods);
1624
1625 if (inter != 0 && inter != outof_target)
1626 emit_move_insn (outof_target, inter);
1627 }
1628
1629 insns = get_insns ();
1630 end_sequence ();
1631
1632 if (inter != 0)
1633 {
1634 emit_insn (insns);
1635 return target;
1636 }
1637 }
1638
1639 /* These can be done a word at a time by propagating carries. */
1640 if ((binoptab == add_optab || binoptab == sub_optab)
1641 && is_int_mode (mode, &int_mode)
1642 && GET_MODE_SIZE (int_mode) >= 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD
1643 && optab_handler (binoptab, word_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
1644 {
1645 unsigned int i;
1646 optab otheroptab = binoptab == add_optab ? sub_optab : add_optab;
1647 const unsigned int nwords = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (int_mode) / BITS_PER_WORD;
1648 rtx carry_in = NULL_RTX, carry_out = NULL_RTX;
1649 rtx xop0, xop1, xtarget;
1650
1651 /* We can handle either a 1 or -1 value for the carry. If STORE_FLAG
1652 value is one of those, use it. Otherwise, use 1 since it is the
1653 one easiest to get. */
1654 #if STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1
1655 int normalizep = STORE_FLAG_VALUE;
1656 #else
1657 int normalizep = 1;
1658 #endif
1659
1660 /* Prepare the operands. */
1661 xop0 = force_reg (int_mode, op0);
1662 xop1 = force_reg (int_mode, op1);
1663
1664 xtarget = gen_reg_rtx (int_mode);
1665
1666 if (target == 0 || !REG_P (target) || !valid_multiword_target_p (target))
1667 target = xtarget;
1668
1669 /* Indicate for flow that the entire target reg is being set. */
1670 if (REG_P (target))
1671 emit_clobber (xtarget);
1672
1673 /* Do the actual arithmetic. */
1674 for (i = 0; i < nwords; i++)
1675 {
1676 int index = (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN ? nwords - i - 1 : i);
1677 rtx target_piece = operand_subword (xtarget, index, 1, int_mode);
1678 rtx op0_piece = operand_subword_force (xop0, index, int_mode);
1679 rtx op1_piece = operand_subword_force (xop1, index, int_mode);
1680 rtx x;
1681
1682 /* Main add/subtract of the input operands. */
1683 x = expand_binop (word_mode, binoptab,
1684 op0_piece, op1_piece,
1685 target_piece, unsignedp, next_methods);
1686 if (x == 0)
1687 break;
1688
1689 if (i + 1 < nwords)
1690 {
1691 /* Store carry from main add/subtract. */
1692 carry_out = gen_reg_rtx (word_mode);
1693 carry_out = emit_store_flag_force (carry_out,
1694 (binoptab == add_optab
1695 ? LT : GT),
1696 x, op0_piece,
1697 word_mode, 1, normalizep);
1698 }
1699
1700 if (i > 0)
1701 {
1702 rtx newx;
1703
1704 /* Add/subtract previous carry to main result. */
1705 newx = expand_binop (word_mode,
1706 normalizep == 1 ? binoptab : otheroptab,
1707 x, carry_in,
1708 NULL_RTX, 1, next_methods);
1709
1710 if (i + 1 < nwords)
1711 {
1712 /* Get out carry from adding/subtracting carry in. */
1713 rtx carry_tmp = gen_reg_rtx (word_mode);
1714 carry_tmp = emit_store_flag_force (carry_tmp,
1715 (binoptab == add_optab
1716 ? LT : GT),
1717 newx, x,
1718 word_mode, 1, normalizep);
1719
1720 /* Logical-ior the two poss. carry together. */
1721 carry_out = expand_binop (word_mode, ior_optab,
1722 carry_out, carry_tmp,
1723 carry_out, 0, next_methods);
1724 if (carry_out == 0)
1725 break;
1726 }
1727 emit_move_insn (target_piece, newx);
1728 }
1729 else
1730 {
1731 if (x != target_piece)
1732 emit_move_insn (target_piece, x);
1733 }
1734
1735 carry_in = carry_out;
1736 }
1737
1738 if (i == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (int_mode) / (unsigned) BITS_PER_WORD)
1739 {
1740 if (optab_handler (mov_optab, int_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing
1741 || ! rtx_equal_p (target, xtarget))
1742 {
1743 rtx_insn *temp = emit_move_insn (target, xtarget);
1744
1745 set_dst_reg_note (temp, REG_EQUAL,
1746 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (optab_to_code (binoptab),
1747 int_mode, copy_rtx (xop0),
1748 copy_rtx (xop1)),
1749 target);
1750 }
1751 else
1752 target = xtarget;
1753
1754 return target;
1755 }
1756
1757 else
1758 delete_insns_since (last);
1759 }
1760
1761 /* Attempt to synthesize double word multiplies using a sequence of word
1762 mode multiplications. We first attempt to generate a sequence using a
1763 more efficient unsigned widening multiply, and if that fails we then
1764 try using a signed widening multiply. */
1765
1766 if (binoptab == smul_optab
1767 && is_int_mode (mode, &int_mode)
1768 && GET_MODE_SIZE (int_mode) == 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD
1769 && optab_handler (smul_optab, word_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing
1770 && optab_handler (add_optab, word_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
1771 {
1772 rtx product = NULL_RTX;
1773 if (convert_optab_handler (umul_widen_optab, int_mode, word_mode)
1774 != CODE_FOR_nothing)
1775 {
1776 product = expand_doubleword_mult (int_mode, op0, op1, target,
1777 true, methods);
1778 if (!product)
1779 delete_insns_since (last);
1780 }
1781
1782 if (product == NULL_RTX
1783 && (convert_optab_handler (smul_widen_optab, int_mode, word_mode)
1784 != CODE_FOR_nothing))
1785 {
1786 product = expand_doubleword_mult (int_mode, op0, op1, target,
1787 false, methods);
1788 if (!product)
1789 delete_insns_since (last);
1790 }
1791
1792 if (product != NULL_RTX)
1793 {
1794 if (optab_handler (mov_optab, int_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
1795 {
1796 rtx_insn *move = emit_move_insn (target ? target : product,
1797 product);
1798 set_dst_reg_note (move,
1799 REG_EQUAL,
1800 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (MULT, int_mode,
1801 copy_rtx (op0),
1802 copy_rtx (op1)),
1803 target ? target : product);
1804 }
1805 return product;
1806 }
1807 }
1808
1809 /* It can't be open-coded in this mode.
1810 Use a library call if one is available and caller says that's ok. */
1811
1812 libfunc = optab_libfunc (binoptab, mode);
1813 if (libfunc
1814 && (methods == OPTAB_LIB || methods == OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN))
1815 {
1816 rtx_insn *insns;
1817 rtx op1x = op1;
1818 machine_mode op1_mode = mode;
1819 rtx value;
1820
1821 start_sequence ();
1822
1823 if (shift_optab_p (binoptab))
1824 {
1825 op1_mode = targetm.libgcc_shift_count_mode ();
1826 /* Specify unsigned here,
1827 since negative shift counts are meaningless. */
1828 op1x = convert_to_mode (op1_mode, op1, 1);
1829 }
1830
1831 if (GET_MODE (op0) != VOIDmode
1832 && GET_MODE (op0) != mode)
1833 op0 = convert_to_mode (mode, op0, unsignedp);
1834
1835 /* Pass 1 for NO_QUEUE so we don't lose any increments
1836 if the libcall is cse'd or moved. */
1837 value = emit_library_call_value (libfunc,
1838 NULL_RTX, LCT_CONST, mode,
1839 op0, mode, op1x, op1_mode);
1840
1841 insns = get_insns ();
1842 end_sequence ();
1843
1844 bool trapv = trapv_binoptab_p (binoptab);
1845 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
1846 emit_libcall_block_1 (insns, target, value,
1847 trapv ? NULL_RTX
1848 : gen_rtx_fmt_ee (optab_to_code (binoptab),
1849 mode, op0, op1), trapv);
1850
1851 return target;
1852 }
1853
1854 delete_insns_since (last);
1855
1856 /* It can't be done in this mode. Can we do it in a wider mode? */
1857
1858 if (! (methods == OPTAB_WIDEN || methods == OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
1859 || methods == OPTAB_MUST_WIDEN))
1860 {
1861 /* Caller says, don't even try. */
1862 delete_insns_since (entry_last);
1863 return 0;
1864 }
1865
1866 /* Compute the value of METHODS to pass to recursive calls.
1867 Don't allow widening to be tried recursively. */
1868
1869 methods = (methods == OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN ? OPTAB_LIB : OPTAB_DIRECT);
1870
1871 /* Look for a wider mode of the same class for which it appears we can do
1872 the operation. */
1873
1874 if (CLASS_HAS_WIDER_MODES_P (mclass))
1875 {
1876 /* This code doesn't make sense for conversion optabs, since we
1877 wouldn't then want to extend the operands to be the same size
1878 as the result. */
1879 gcc_assert (!convert_optab_p (binoptab));
1880 FOR_EACH_WIDER_MODE (wider_mode, mode)
1881 {
1882 if (optab_handler (binoptab, wider_mode)
1883 || (methods == OPTAB_LIB
1884 && optab_libfunc (binoptab, wider_mode)))
1885 {
1886 rtx xop0 = op0, xop1 = op1;
1887 int no_extend = 0;
1888
1889 /* For certain integer operations, we need not actually extend
1890 the narrow operands, as long as we will truncate
1891 the results to the same narrowness. */
1892
1893 if ((binoptab == ior_optab || binoptab == and_optab
1894 || binoptab == xor_optab
1895 || binoptab == add_optab || binoptab == sub_optab
1896 || binoptab == smul_optab || binoptab == ashl_optab)
1897 && mclass == MODE_INT)
1898 no_extend = 1;
1899
1900 xop0 = widen_operand (xop0, wider_mode, mode,
1901 unsignedp, no_extend);
1902
1903 /* The second operand of a shift must always be extended. */
1904 xop1 = widen_operand (xop1, wider_mode, mode, unsignedp,
1905 no_extend && binoptab != ashl_optab);
1906
1907 temp = expand_binop (wider_mode, binoptab, xop0, xop1, NULL_RTX,
1908 unsignedp, methods);
1909 if (temp)
1910 {
1911 if (mclass != MODE_INT
1912 || !TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (mode, wider_mode))
1913 {
1914 if (target == 0)
1915 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
1916 convert_move (target, temp, 0);
1917 return target;
1918 }
1919 else
1920 return gen_lowpart (mode, temp);
1921 }
1922 else
1923 delete_insns_since (last);
1924 }
1925 }
1926 }
1927
1928 delete_insns_since (entry_last);
1929 return 0;
1930 }
1931
1932 /* Expand a binary operator which has both signed and unsigned forms.
1933 UOPTAB is the optab for unsigned operations, and SOPTAB is for
1934 signed operations.
1935
1936 If we widen unsigned operands, we may use a signed wider operation instead
1937 of an unsigned wider operation, since the result would be the same. */
1938
1939 rtx
sign_expand_binop(machine_mode mode,optab uoptab,optab soptab,rtx op0,rtx op1,rtx target,int unsignedp,enum optab_methods methods)1940 sign_expand_binop (machine_mode mode, optab uoptab, optab soptab,
1941 rtx op0, rtx op1, rtx target, int unsignedp,
1942 enum optab_methods methods)
1943 {
1944 rtx temp;
1945 optab direct_optab = unsignedp ? uoptab : soptab;
1946 bool save_enable;
1947
1948 /* Do it without widening, if possible. */
1949 temp = expand_binop (mode, direct_optab, op0, op1, target,
1950 unsignedp, OPTAB_DIRECT);
1951 if (temp || methods == OPTAB_DIRECT)
1952 return temp;
1953
1954 /* Try widening to a signed int. Disable any direct use of any
1955 signed insn in the current mode. */
1956 save_enable = swap_optab_enable (soptab, mode, false);
1957
1958 temp = expand_binop (mode, soptab, op0, op1, target,
1959 unsignedp, OPTAB_WIDEN);
1960
1961 /* For unsigned operands, try widening to an unsigned int. */
1962 if (!temp && unsignedp)
1963 temp = expand_binop (mode, uoptab, op0, op1, target,
1964 unsignedp, OPTAB_WIDEN);
1965 if (temp || methods == OPTAB_WIDEN)
1966 goto egress;
1967
1968 /* Use the right width libcall if that exists. */
1969 temp = expand_binop (mode, direct_optab, op0, op1, target,
1970 unsignedp, OPTAB_LIB);
1971 if (temp || methods == OPTAB_LIB)
1972 goto egress;
1973
1974 /* Must widen and use a libcall, use either signed or unsigned. */
1975 temp = expand_binop (mode, soptab, op0, op1, target,
1976 unsignedp, methods);
1977 if (!temp && unsignedp)
1978 temp = expand_binop (mode, uoptab, op0, op1, target,
1979 unsignedp, methods);
1980
1981 egress:
1982 /* Undo the fiddling above. */
1983 if (save_enable)
1984 swap_optab_enable (soptab, mode, true);
1985 return temp;
1986 }
1987
1988 /* Generate code to perform an operation specified by UNOPPTAB
1989 on operand OP0, with two results to TARG0 and TARG1.
1990 We assume that the order of the operands for the instruction
1991 is TARG0, TARG1, OP0.
1992
1993 Either TARG0 or TARG1 may be zero, but what that means is that
1994 the result is not actually wanted. We will generate it into
1995 a dummy pseudo-reg and discard it. They may not both be zero.
1996
1997 Returns 1 if this operation can be performed; 0 if not. */
1998
1999 int
expand_twoval_unop(optab unoptab,rtx op0,rtx targ0,rtx targ1,int unsignedp)2000 expand_twoval_unop (optab unoptab, rtx op0, rtx targ0, rtx targ1,
2001 int unsignedp)
2002 {
2003 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (targ0 ? targ0 : targ1);
2004 enum mode_class mclass;
2005 machine_mode wider_mode;
2006 rtx_insn *entry_last = get_last_insn ();
2007 rtx_insn *last;
2008
2009 mclass = GET_MODE_CLASS (mode);
2010
2011 if (!targ0)
2012 targ0 = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
2013 if (!targ1)
2014 targ1 = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
2015
2016 /* Record where to go back to if we fail. */
2017 last = get_last_insn ();
2018
2019 if (optab_handler (unoptab, mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
2020 {
2021 class expand_operand ops[3];
2022 enum insn_code icode = optab_handler (unoptab, mode);
2023
2024 create_fixed_operand (&ops[0], targ0);
2025 create_fixed_operand (&ops[1], targ1);
2026 create_convert_operand_from (&ops[2], op0, mode, unsignedp);
2027 if (maybe_expand_insn (icode, 3, ops))
2028 return 1;
2029 }
2030
2031 /* It can't be done in this mode. Can we do it in a wider mode? */
2032
2033 if (CLASS_HAS_WIDER_MODES_P (mclass))
2034 {
2035 FOR_EACH_WIDER_MODE (wider_mode, mode)
2036 {
2037 if (optab_handler (unoptab, wider_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
2038 {
2039 rtx t0 = gen_reg_rtx (wider_mode);
2040 rtx t1 = gen_reg_rtx (wider_mode);
2041 rtx cop0 = convert_modes (wider_mode, mode, op0, unsignedp);
2042
2043 if (expand_twoval_unop (unoptab, cop0, t0, t1, unsignedp))
2044 {
2045 convert_move (targ0, t0, unsignedp);
2046 convert_move (targ1, t1, unsignedp);
2047 return 1;
2048 }
2049 else
2050 delete_insns_since (last);
2051 }
2052 }
2053 }
2054
2055 delete_insns_since (entry_last);
2056 return 0;
2057 }
2058
2059 /* Generate code to perform an operation specified by BINOPTAB
2060 on operands OP0 and OP1, with two results to TARG1 and TARG2.
2061 We assume that the order of the operands for the instruction
2062 is TARG0, OP0, OP1, TARG1, which would fit a pattern like
2063 [(set TARG0 (operate OP0 OP1)) (set TARG1 (operate ...))].
2064
2065 Either TARG0 or TARG1 may be zero, but what that means is that
2066 the result is not actually wanted. We will generate it into
2067 a dummy pseudo-reg and discard it. They may not both be zero.
2068
2069 Returns 1 if this operation can be performed; 0 if not. */
2070
2071 int
expand_twoval_binop(optab binoptab,rtx op0,rtx op1,rtx targ0,rtx targ1,int unsignedp)2072 expand_twoval_binop (optab binoptab, rtx op0, rtx op1, rtx targ0, rtx targ1,
2073 int unsignedp)
2074 {
2075 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (targ0 ? targ0 : targ1);
2076 enum mode_class mclass;
2077 machine_mode wider_mode;
2078 rtx_insn *entry_last = get_last_insn ();
2079 rtx_insn *last;
2080
2081 mclass = GET_MODE_CLASS (mode);
2082
2083 if (!targ0)
2084 targ0 = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
2085 if (!targ1)
2086 targ1 = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
2087
2088 /* Record where to go back to if we fail. */
2089 last = get_last_insn ();
2090
2091 if (optab_handler (binoptab, mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
2092 {
2093 class expand_operand ops[4];
2094 enum insn_code icode = optab_handler (binoptab, mode);
2095 machine_mode mode0 = insn_data[icode].operand[1].mode;
2096 machine_mode mode1 = insn_data[icode].operand[2].mode;
2097 rtx xop0 = op0, xop1 = op1;
2098
2099 /* If we are optimizing, force expensive constants into a register. */
2100 xop0 = avoid_expensive_constant (mode0, binoptab, 0, xop0, unsignedp);
2101 xop1 = avoid_expensive_constant (mode1, binoptab, 1, xop1, unsignedp);
2102
2103 create_fixed_operand (&ops[0], targ0);
2104 create_convert_operand_from (&ops[1], xop0, mode, unsignedp);
2105 create_convert_operand_from (&ops[2], xop1, mode, unsignedp);
2106 create_fixed_operand (&ops[3], targ1);
2107 if (maybe_expand_insn (icode, 4, ops))
2108 return 1;
2109 delete_insns_since (last);
2110 }
2111
2112 /* It can't be done in this mode. Can we do it in a wider mode? */
2113
2114 if (CLASS_HAS_WIDER_MODES_P (mclass))
2115 {
2116 FOR_EACH_WIDER_MODE (wider_mode, mode)
2117 {
2118 if (optab_handler (binoptab, wider_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
2119 {
2120 rtx t0 = gen_reg_rtx (wider_mode);
2121 rtx t1 = gen_reg_rtx (wider_mode);
2122 rtx cop0 = convert_modes (wider_mode, mode, op0, unsignedp);
2123 rtx cop1 = convert_modes (wider_mode, mode, op1, unsignedp);
2124
2125 if (expand_twoval_binop (binoptab, cop0, cop1,
2126 t0, t1, unsignedp))
2127 {
2128 convert_move (targ0, t0, unsignedp);
2129 convert_move (targ1, t1, unsignedp);
2130 return 1;
2131 }
2132 else
2133 delete_insns_since (last);
2134 }
2135 }
2136 }
2137
2138 delete_insns_since (entry_last);
2139 return 0;
2140 }
2141
2142 /* Expand the two-valued library call indicated by BINOPTAB, but
2143 preserve only one of the values. If TARG0 is non-NULL, the first
2144 value is placed into TARG0; otherwise the second value is placed
2145 into TARG1. Exactly one of TARG0 and TARG1 must be non-NULL. The
2146 value stored into TARG0 or TARG1 is equivalent to (CODE OP0 OP1).
2147 This routine assumes that the value returned by the library call is
2148 as if the return value was of an integral mode twice as wide as the
2149 mode of OP0. Returns 1 if the call was successful. */
2150
2151 bool
expand_twoval_binop_libfunc(optab binoptab,rtx op0,rtx op1,rtx targ0,rtx targ1,enum rtx_code code)2152 expand_twoval_binop_libfunc (optab binoptab, rtx op0, rtx op1,
2153 rtx targ0, rtx targ1, enum rtx_code code)
2154 {
2155 machine_mode mode;
2156 machine_mode libval_mode;
2157 rtx libval;
2158 rtx_insn *insns;
2159 rtx libfunc;
2160
2161 /* Exactly one of TARG0 or TARG1 should be non-NULL. */
2162 gcc_assert (!targ0 != !targ1);
2163
2164 mode = GET_MODE (op0);
2165 libfunc = optab_libfunc (binoptab, mode);
2166 if (!libfunc)
2167 return false;
2168
2169 /* The value returned by the library function will have twice as
2170 many bits as the nominal MODE. */
2171 libval_mode = smallest_int_mode_for_size (2 * GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode));
2172 start_sequence ();
2173 libval = emit_library_call_value (libfunc, NULL_RTX, LCT_CONST,
2174 libval_mode,
2175 op0, mode,
2176 op1, mode);
2177 /* Get the part of VAL containing the value that we want. */
2178 libval = simplify_gen_subreg (mode, libval, libval_mode,
2179 targ0 ? 0 : GET_MODE_SIZE (mode));
2180 insns = get_insns ();
2181 end_sequence ();
2182 /* Move the into the desired location. */
2183 emit_libcall_block (insns, targ0 ? targ0 : targ1, libval,
2184 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code, mode, op0, op1));
2185
2186 return true;
2187 }
2188
2189
2190 /* Wrapper around expand_unop which takes an rtx code to specify
2191 the operation to perform, not an optab pointer. All other
2192 arguments are the same. */
2193 rtx
expand_simple_unop(machine_mode mode,enum rtx_code code,rtx op0,rtx target,int unsignedp)2194 expand_simple_unop (machine_mode mode, enum rtx_code code, rtx op0,
2195 rtx target, int unsignedp)
2196 {
2197 optab unop = code_to_optab (code);
2198 gcc_assert (unop);
2199
2200 return expand_unop (mode, unop, op0, target, unsignedp);
2201 }
2202
2203 /* Try calculating
2204 (clz:narrow x)
2205 as
2206 (clz:wide (zero_extend:wide x)) - ((width wide) - (width narrow)).
2207
2208 A similar operation can be used for clrsb. UNOPTAB says which operation
2209 we are trying to expand. */
2210 static rtx
widen_leading(scalar_int_mode mode,rtx op0,rtx target,optab unoptab)2211 widen_leading (scalar_int_mode mode, rtx op0, rtx target, optab unoptab)
2212 {
2213 opt_scalar_int_mode wider_mode_iter;
2214 FOR_EACH_WIDER_MODE (wider_mode_iter, mode)
2215 {
2216 scalar_int_mode wider_mode = wider_mode_iter.require ();
2217 if (optab_handler (unoptab, wider_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
2218 {
2219 rtx xop0, temp;
2220 rtx_insn *last;
2221
2222 last = get_last_insn ();
2223
2224 if (target == 0)
2225 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
2226 xop0 = widen_operand (op0, wider_mode, mode,
2227 unoptab != clrsb_optab, false);
2228 temp = expand_unop (wider_mode, unoptab, xop0, NULL_RTX,
2229 unoptab != clrsb_optab);
2230 if (temp != 0)
2231 temp = expand_binop
2232 (wider_mode, sub_optab, temp,
2233 gen_int_mode (GET_MODE_PRECISION (wider_mode)
2234 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode),
2235 wider_mode),
2236 target, true, OPTAB_DIRECT);
2237 if (temp == 0)
2238 delete_insns_since (last);
2239
2240 return temp;
2241 }
2242 }
2243 return 0;
2244 }
2245
2246 /* Try calculating clz of a double-word quantity as two clz's of word-sized
2247 quantities, choosing which based on whether the high word is nonzero. */
2248 static rtx
expand_doubleword_clz(scalar_int_mode mode,rtx op0,rtx target)2249 expand_doubleword_clz (scalar_int_mode mode, rtx op0, rtx target)
2250 {
2251 rtx xop0 = force_reg (mode, op0);
2252 rtx subhi = gen_highpart (word_mode, xop0);
2253 rtx sublo = gen_lowpart (word_mode, xop0);
2254 rtx_code_label *hi0_label = gen_label_rtx ();
2255 rtx_code_label *after_label = gen_label_rtx ();
2256 rtx_insn *seq;
2257 rtx temp, result;
2258
2259 /* If we were not given a target, use a word_mode register, not a
2260 'mode' register. The result will fit, and nobody is expecting
2261 anything bigger (the return type of __builtin_clz* is int). */
2262 if (!target)
2263 target = gen_reg_rtx (word_mode);
2264
2265 /* In any case, write to a word_mode scratch in both branches of the
2266 conditional, so we can ensure there is a single move insn setting
2267 'target' to tag a REG_EQUAL note on. */
2268 result = gen_reg_rtx (word_mode);
2269
2270 start_sequence ();
2271
2272 /* If the high word is not equal to zero,
2273 then clz of the full value is clz of the high word. */
2274 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (subhi, CONST0_RTX (word_mode), EQ, 0,
2275 word_mode, true, hi0_label);
2276
2277 temp = expand_unop_direct (word_mode, clz_optab, subhi, result, true);
2278 if (!temp)
2279 goto fail;
2280
2281 if (temp != result)
2282 convert_move (result, temp, true);
2283
2284 emit_jump_insn (targetm.gen_jump (after_label));
2285 emit_barrier ();
2286
2287 /* Else clz of the full value is clz of the low word plus the number
2288 of bits in the high word. */
2289 emit_label (hi0_label);
2290
2291 temp = expand_unop_direct (word_mode, clz_optab, sublo, 0, true);
2292 if (!temp)
2293 goto fail;
2294 temp = expand_binop (word_mode, add_optab, temp,
2295 gen_int_mode (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (word_mode), word_mode),
2296 result, true, OPTAB_DIRECT);
2297 if (!temp)
2298 goto fail;
2299 if (temp != result)
2300 convert_move (result, temp, true);
2301
2302 emit_label (after_label);
2303 convert_move (target, result, true);
2304
2305 seq = get_insns ();
2306 end_sequence ();
2307
2308 add_equal_note (seq, target, CLZ, xop0, NULL_RTX, mode);
2309 emit_insn (seq);
2310 return target;
2311
2312 fail:
2313 end_sequence ();
2314 return 0;
2315 }
2316
2317 /* Try calculating popcount of a double-word quantity as two popcount's of
2318 word-sized quantities and summing up the results. */
2319 static rtx
expand_doubleword_popcount(scalar_int_mode mode,rtx op0,rtx target)2320 expand_doubleword_popcount (scalar_int_mode mode, rtx op0, rtx target)
2321 {
2322 rtx t0, t1, t;
2323 rtx_insn *seq;
2324
2325 start_sequence ();
2326
2327 t0 = expand_unop_direct (word_mode, popcount_optab,
2328 operand_subword_force (op0, 0, mode), NULL_RTX,
2329 true);
2330 t1 = expand_unop_direct (word_mode, popcount_optab,
2331 operand_subword_force (op0, 1, mode), NULL_RTX,
2332 true);
2333 if (!t0 || !t1)
2334 {
2335 end_sequence ();
2336 return NULL_RTX;
2337 }
2338
2339 /* If we were not given a target, use a word_mode register, not a
2340 'mode' register. The result will fit, and nobody is expecting
2341 anything bigger (the return type of __builtin_popcount* is int). */
2342 if (!target)
2343 target = gen_reg_rtx (word_mode);
2344
2345 t = expand_binop (word_mode, add_optab, t0, t1, target, 0, OPTAB_DIRECT);
2346
2347 seq = get_insns ();
2348 end_sequence ();
2349
2350 add_equal_note (seq, t, POPCOUNT, op0, NULL_RTX, mode);
2351 emit_insn (seq);
2352 return t;
2353 }
2354
2355 /* Try calculating
2356 (parity:wide x)
2357 as
2358 (parity:narrow (low (x) ^ high (x))) */
2359 static rtx
expand_doubleword_parity(scalar_int_mode mode,rtx op0,rtx target)2360 expand_doubleword_parity (scalar_int_mode mode, rtx op0, rtx target)
2361 {
2362 rtx t = expand_binop (word_mode, xor_optab,
2363 operand_subword_force (op0, 0, mode),
2364 operand_subword_force (op0, 1, mode),
2365 NULL_RTX, 0, OPTAB_DIRECT);
2366 return expand_unop (word_mode, parity_optab, t, target, true);
2367 }
2368
2369 /* Try calculating
2370 (bswap:narrow x)
2371 as
2372 (lshiftrt:wide (bswap:wide x) ((width wide) - (width narrow))). */
2373 static rtx
widen_bswap(scalar_int_mode mode,rtx op0,rtx target)2374 widen_bswap (scalar_int_mode mode, rtx op0, rtx target)
2375 {
2376 rtx x;
2377 rtx_insn *last;
2378 opt_scalar_int_mode wider_mode_iter;
2379
2380 FOR_EACH_WIDER_MODE (wider_mode_iter, mode)
2381 if (optab_handler (bswap_optab, wider_mode_iter.require ())
2382 != CODE_FOR_nothing)
2383 break;
2384
2385 if (!wider_mode_iter.exists ())
2386 return NULL_RTX;
2387
2388 scalar_int_mode wider_mode = wider_mode_iter.require ();
2389 last = get_last_insn ();
2390
2391 x = widen_operand (op0, wider_mode, mode, true, true);
2392 x = expand_unop (wider_mode, bswap_optab, x, NULL_RTX, true);
2393
2394 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_PRECISION (wider_mode) == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wider_mode)
2395 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode));
2396 if (x != 0)
2397 x = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, wider_mode, x,
2398 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wider_mode)
2399 - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode),
2400 NULL_RTX, true);
2401
2402 if (x != 0)
2403 {
2404 if (target == 0)
2405 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
2406 emit_move_insn (target, gen_lowpart (mode, x));
2407 }
2408 else
2409 delete_insns_since (last);
2410
2411 return target;
2412 }
2413
2414 /* Try calculating bswap as two bswaps of two word-sized operands. */
2415
2416 static rtx
expand_doubleword_bswap(machine_mode mode,rtx op,rtx target)2417 expand_doubleword_bswap (machine_mode mode, rtx op, rtx target)
2418 {
2419 rtx t0, t1;
2420
2421 t1 = expand_unop (word_mode, bswap_optab,
2422 operand_subword_force (op, 0, mode), NULL_RTX, true);
2423 t0 = expand_unop (word_mode, bswap_optab,
2424 operand_subword_force (op, 1, mode), NULL_RTX, true);
2425
2426 if (target == 0 || !valid_multiword_target_p (target))
2427 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
2428 if (REG_P (target))
2429 emit_clobber (target);
2430 emit_move_insn (operand_subword (target, 0, 1, mode), t0);
2431 emit_move_insn (operand_subword (target, 1, 1, mode), t1);
2432
2433 return target;
2434 }
2435
2436 /* Try calculating (parity x) as (and (popcount x) 1), where
2437 popcount can also be done in a wider mode. */
2438 static rtx
expand_parity(scalar_int_mode mode,rtx op0,rtx target)2439 expand_parity (scalar_int_mode mode, rtx op0, rtx target)
2440 {
2441 enum mode_class mclass = GET_MODE_CLASS (mode);
2442 opt_scalar_int_mode wider_mode_iter;
2443 FOR_EACH_MODE_FROM (wider_mode_iter, mode)
2444 {
2445 scalar_int_mode wider_mode = wider_mode_iter.require ();
2446 if (optab_handler (popcount_optab, wider_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
2447 {
2448 rtx xop0, temp;
2449 rtx_insn *last;
2450
2451 last = get_last_insn ();
2452
2453 if (target == 0 || GET_MODE (target) != wider_mode)
2454 target = gen_reg_rtx (wider_mode);
2455
2456 xop0 = widen_operand (op0, wider_mode, mode, true, false);
2457 temp = expand_unop (wider_mode, popcount_optab, xop0, NULL_RTX,
2458 true);
2459 if (temp != 0)
2460 temp = expand_binop (wider_mode, and_optab, temp, const1_rtx,
2461 target, true, OPTAB_DIRECT);
2462
2463 if (temp)
2464 {
2465 if (mclass != MODE_INT
2466 || !TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (mode, wider_mode))
2467 return convert_to_mode (mode, temp, 0);
2468 else
2469 return gen_lowpart (mode, temp);
2470 }
2471 else
2472 delete_insns_since (last);
2473 }
2474 }
2475 return 0;
2476 }
2477
2478 /* Try calculating ctz(x) as K - clz(x & -x) ,
2479 where K is GET_MODE_PRECISION(mode) - 1.
2480
2481 Both __builtin_ctz and __builtin_clz are undefined at zero, so we
2482 don't have to worry about what the hardware does in that case. (If
2483 the clz instruction produces the usual value at 0, which is K, the
2484 result of this code sequence will be -1; expand_ffs, below, relies
2485 on this. It might be nice to have it be K instead, for consistency
2486 with the (very few) processors that provide a ctz with a defined
2487 value, but that would take one more instruction, and it would be
2488 less convenient for expand_ffs anyway. */
2489
2490 static rtx
expand_ctz(scalar_int_mode mode,rtx op0,rtx target)2491 expand_ctz (scalar_int_mode mode, rtx op0, rtx target)
2492 {
2493 rtx_insn *seq;
2494 rtx temp;
2495
2496 if (optab_handler (clz_optab, mode) == CODE_FOR_nothing)
2497 return 0;
2498
2499 start_sequence ();
2500
2501 temp = expand_unop_direct (mode, neg_optab, op0, NULL_RTX, true);
2502 if (temp)
2503 temp = expand_binop (mode, and_optab, op0, temp, NULL_RTX,
2504 true, OPTAB_DIRECT);
2505 if (temp)
2506 temp = expand_unop_direct (mode, clz_optab, temp, NULL_RTX, true);
2507 if (temp)
2508 temp = expand_binop (mode, sub_optab,
2509 gen_int_mode (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1, mode),
2510 temp, target,
2511 true, OPTAB_DIRECT);
2512 if (temp == 0)
2513 {
2514 end_sequence ();
2515 return 0;
2516 }
2517
2518 seq = get_insns ();
2519 end_sequence ();
2520
2521 add_equal_note (seq, temp, CTZ, op0, NULL_RTX, mode);
2522 emit_insn (seq);
2523 return temp;
2524 }
2525
2526
2527 /* Try calculating ffs(x) using ctz(x) if we have that instruction, or
2528 else with the sequence used by expand_clz.
2529
2530 The ffs builtin promises to return zero for a zero value and ctz/clz
2531 may have an undefined value in that case. If they do not give us a
2532 convenient value, we have to generate a test and branch. */
2533 static rtx
expand_ffs(scalar_int_mode mode,rtx op0,rtx target)2534 expand_ffs (scalar_int_mode mode, rtx op0, rtx target)
2535 {
2536 HOST_WIDE_INT val = 0;
2537 bool defined_at_zero = false;
2538 rtx temp;
2539 rtx_insn *seq;
2540
2541 if (optab_handler (ctz_optab, mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
2542 {
2543 start_sequence ();
2544
2545 temp = expand_unop_direct (mode, ctz_optab, op0, 0, true);
2546 if (!temp)
2547 goto fail;
2548
2549 defined_at_zero = (CTZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (mode, val) == 2);
2550 }
2551 else if (optab_handler (clz_optab, mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
2552 {
2553 start_sequence ();
2554 temp = expand_ctz (mode, op0, 0);
2555 if (!temp)
2556 goto fail;
2557
2558 if (CLZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (mode, val) == 2)
2559 {
2560 defined_at_zero = true;
2561 val = (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1) - val;
2562 }
2563 }
2564 else
2565 return 0;
2566
2567 if (defined_at_zero && val == -1)
2568 /* No correction needed at zero. */;
2569 else
2570 {
2571 /* We don't try to do anything clever with the situation found
2572 on some processors (eg Alpha) where ctz(0:mode) ==
2573 bitsize(mode). If someone can think of a way to send N to -1
2574 and leave alone all values in the range 0..N-1 (where N is a
2575 power of two), cheaper than this test-and-branch, please add it.
2576
2577 The test-and-branch is done after the operation itself, in case
2578 the operation sets condition codes that can be recycled for this.
2579 (This is true on i386, for instance.) */
2580
2581 rtx_code_label *nonzero_label = gen_label_rtx ();
2582 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (op0, CONST0_RTX (mode), NE, 0,
2583 mode, true, nonzero_label);
2584
2585 convert_move (temp, GEN_INT (-1), false);
2586 emit_label (nonzero_label);
2587 }
2588
2589 /* temp now has a value in the range -1..bitsize-1. ffs is supposed
2590 to produce a value in the range 0..bitsize. */
2591 temp = expand_binop (mode, add_optab, temp, gen_int_mode (1, mode),
2592 target, false, OPTAB_DIRECT);
2593 if (!temp)
2594 goto fail;
2595
2596 seq = get_insns ();
2597 end_sequence ();
2598
2599 add_equal_note (seq, temp, FFS, op0, NULL_RTX, mode);
2600 emit_insn (seq);
2601 return temp;
2602
2603 fail:
2604 end_sequence ();
2605 return 0;
2606 }
2607
2608 /* Extract the OMODE lowpart from VAL, which has IMODE. Under certain
2609 conditions, VAL may already be a SUBREG against which we cannot generate
2610 a further SUBREG. In this case, we expect forcing the value into a
2611 register will work around the situation. */
2612
2613 static rtx
lowpart_subreg_maybe_copy(machine_mode omode,rtx val,machine_mode imode)2614 lowpart_subreg_maybe_copy (machine_mode omode, rtx val,
2615 machine_mode imode)
2616 {
2617 rtx ret;
2618 ret = lowpart_subreg (omode, val, imode);
2619 if (ret == NULL)
2620 {
2621 val = force_reg (imode, val);
2622 ret = lowpart_subreg (omode, val, imode);
2623 gcc_assert (ret != NULL);
2624 }
2625 return ret;
2626 }
2627
2628 /* Expand a floating point absolute value or negation operation via a
2629 logical operation on the sign bit. */
2630
2631 static rtx
expand_absneg_bit(enum rtx_code code,scalar_float_mode mode,rtx op0,rtx target)2632 expand_absneg_bit (enum rtx_code code, scalar_float_mode mode,
2633 rtx op0, rtx target)
2634 {
2635 const struct real_format *fmt;
2636 int bitpos, word, nwords, i;
2637 scalar_int_mode imode;
2638 rtx temp;
2639 rtx_insn *insns;
2640
2641 /* The format has to have a simple sign bit. */
2642 fmt = REAL_MODE_FORMAT (mode);
2643 if (fmt == NULL)
2644 return NULL_RTX;
2645
2646 bitpos = fmt->signbit_rw;
2647 if (bitpos < 0)
2648 return NULL_RTX;
2649
2650 /* Don't create negative zeros if the format doesn't support them. */
2651 if (code == NEG && !fmt->has_signed_zero)
2652 return NULL_RTX;
2653
2654 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD)
2655 {
2656 if (!int_mode_for_mode (mode).exists (&imode))
2657 return NULL_RTX;
2658 word = 0;
2659 nwords = 1;
2660 }
2661 else
2662 {
2663 imode = word_mode;
2664
2665 if (FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
2666 word = (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - bitpos) / BITS_PER_WORD;
2667 else
2668 word = bitpos / BITS_PER_WORD;
2669 bitpos = bitpos % BITS_PER_WORD;
2670 nwords = (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) + BITS_PER_WORD - 1) / BITS_PER_WORD;
2671 }
2672
2673 wide_int mask = wi::set_bit_in_zero (bitpos, GET_MODE_PRECISION (imode));
2674 if (code == ABS)
2675 mask = ~mask;
2676
2677 if (target == 0
2678 || target == op0
2679 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (target, op0)
2680 || (nwords > 1 && !valid_multiword_target_p (target)))
2681 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
2682
2683 if (nwords > 1)
2684 {
2685 start_sequence ();
2686
2687 for (i = 0; i < nwords; ++i)
2688 {
2689 rtx targ_piece = operand_subword (target, i, 1, mode);
2690 rtx op0_piece = operand_subword_force (op0, i, mode);
2691
2692 if (i == word)
2693 {
2694 temp = expand_binop (imode, code == ABS ? and_optab : xor_optab,
2695 op0_piece,
2696 immed_wide_int_const (mask, imode),
2697 targ_piece, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
2698 if (temp != targ_piece)
2699 emit_move_insn (targ_piece, temp);
2700 }
2701 else
2702 emit_move_insn (targ_piece, op0_piece);
2703 }
2704
2705 insns = get_insns ();
2706 end_sequence ();
2707
2708 emit_insn (insns);
2709 }
2710 else
2711 {
2712 temp = expand_binop (imode, code == ABS ? and_optab : xor_optab,
2713 gen_lowpart (imode, op0),
2714 immed_wide_int_const (mask, imode),
2715 gen_lowpart (imode, target), 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
2716 target = lowpart_subreg_maybe_copy (mode, temp, imode);
2717
2718 set_dst_reg_note (get_last_insn (), REG_EQUAL,
2719 gen_rtx_fmt_e (code, mode, copy_rtx (op0)),
2720 target);
2721 }
2722
2723 return target;
2724 }
2725
2726 /* As expand_unop, but will fail rather than attempt the operation in a
2727 different mode or with a libcall. */
2728 static rtx
expand_unop_direct(machine_mode mode,optab unoptab,rtx op0,rtx target,int unsignedp)2729 expand_unop_direct (machine_mode mode, optab unoptab, rtx op0, rtx target,
2730 int unsignedp)
2731 {
2732 if (optab_handler (unoptab, mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
2733 {
2734 class expand_operand ops[2];
2735 enum insn_code icode = optab_handler (unoptab, mode);
2736 rtx_insn *last = get_last_insn ();
2737 rtx_insn *pat;
2738
2739 create_output_operand (&ops[0], target, mode);
2740 create_convert_operand_from (&ops[1], op0, mode, unsignedp);
2741 pat = maybe_gen_insn (icode, 2, ops);
2742 if (pat)
2743 {
2744 if (INSN_P (pat) && NEXT_INSN (pat) != NULL_RTX
2745 && ! add_equal_note (pat, ops[0].value,
2746 optab_to_code (unoptab),
2747 ops[1].value, NULL_RTX, mode))
2748 {
2749 delete_insns_since (last);
2750 return expand_unop (mode, unoptab, op0, NULL_RTX, unsignedp);
2751 }
2752
2753 emit_insn (pat);
2754
2755 return ops[0].value;
2756 }
2757 }
2758 return 0;
2759 }
2760
2761 /* Generate code to perform an operation specified by UNOPTAB
2762 on operand OP0, with result having machine-mode MODE.
2763
2764 UNSIGNEDP is for the case where we have to widen the operands
2765 to perform the operation. It says to use zero-extension.
2766
2767 If TARGET is nonzero, the value
2768 is generated there, if it is convenient to do so.
2769 In all cases an rtx is returned for the locus of the value;
2770 this may or may not be TARGET. */
2771
2772 rtx
expand_unop(machine_mode mode,optab unoptab,rtx op0,rtx target,int unsignedp)2773 expand_unop (machine_mode mode, optab unoptab, rtx op0, rtx target,
2774 int unsignedp)
2775 {
2776 enum mode_class mclass = GET_MODE_CLASS (mode);
2777 machine_mode wider_mode;
2778 scalar_int_mode int_mode;
2779 scalar_float_mode float_mode;
2780 rtx temp;
2781 rtx libfunc;
2782
2783 temp = expand_unop_direct (mode, unoptab, op0, target, unsignedp);
2784 if (temp)
2785 return temp;
2786
2787 /* It can't be done in this mode. Can we open-code it in a wider mode? */
2788
2789 /* Widening (or narrowing) clz needs special treatment. */
2790 if (unoptab == clz_optab)
2791 {
2792 if (is_a <scalar_int_mode> (mode, &int_mode))
2793 {
2794 temp = widen_leading (int_mode, op0, target, unoptab);
2795 if (temp)
2796 return temp;
2797
2798 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (int_mode) == 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD
2799 && optab_handler (unoptab, word_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
2800 {
2801 temp = expand_doubleword_clz (int_mode, op0, target);
2802 if (temp)
2803 return temp;
2804 }
2805 }
2806
2807 goto try_libcall;
2808 }
2809
2810 if (unoptab == clrsb_optab)
2811 {
2812 if (is_a <scalar_int_mode> (mode, &int_mode))
2813 {
2814 temp = widen_leading (int_mode, op0, target, unoptab);
2815 if (temp)
2816 return temp;
2817 }
2818 goto try_libcall;
2819 }
2820
2821 if (unoptab == popcount_optab
2822 && is_a <scalar_int_mode> (mode, &int_mode)
2823 && GET_MODE_SIZE (int_mode) == 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD
2824 && optab_handler (unoptab, word_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing
2825 && optimize_insn_for_speed_p ())
2826 {
2827 temp = expand_doubleword_popcount (int_mode, op0, target);
2828 if (temp)
2829 return temp;
2830 }
2831
2832 if (unoptab == parity_optab
2833 && is_a <scalar_int_mode> (mode, &int_mode)
2834 && GET_MODE_SIZE (int_mode) == 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD
2835 && (optab_handler (unoptab, word_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing
2836 || optab_handler (popcount_optab, word_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
2837 && optimize_insn_for_speed_p ())
2838 {
2839 temp = expand_doubleword_parity (int_mode, op0, target);
2840 if (temp)
2841 return temp;
2842 }
2843
2844 /* Widening (or narrowing) bswap needs special treatment. */
2845 if (unoptab == bswap_optab)
2846 {
2847 /* HImode is special because in this mode BSWAP is equivalent to ROTATE
2848 or ROTATERT. First try these directly; if this fails, then try the
2849 obvious pair of shifts with allowed widening, as this will probably
2850 be always more efficient than the other fallback methods. */
2851 if (mode == HImode)
2852 {
2853 rtx_insn *last;
2854 rtx temp1, temp2;
2855
2856 if (optab_handler (rotl_optab, mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
2857 {
2858 temp = expand_binop (mode, rotl_optab, op0,
2859 gen_int_shift_amount (mode, 8),
2860 target, unsignedp, OPTAB_DIRECT);
2861 if (temp)
2862 return temp;
2863 }
2864
2865 if (optab_handler (rotr_optab, mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
2866 {
2867 temp = expand_binop (mode, rotr_optab, op0,
2868 gen_int_shift_amount (mode, 8),
2869 target, unsignedp, OPTAB_DIRECT);
2870 if (temp)
2871 return temp;
2872 }
2873
2874 last = get_last_insn ();
2875
2876 temp1 = expand_binop (mode, ashl_optab, op0,
2877 gen_int_shift_amount (mode, 8), NULL_RTX,
2878 unsignedp, OPTAB_WIDEN);
2879 temp2 = expand_binop (mode, lshr_optab, op0,
2880 gen_int_shift_amount (mode, 8), NULL_RTX,
2881 unsignedp, OPTAB_WIDEN);
2882 if (temp1 && temp2)
2883 {
2884 temp = expand_binop (mode, ior_optab, temp1, temp2, target,
2885 unsignedp, OPTAB_WIDEN);
2886 if (temp)
2887 return temp;
2888 }
2889
2890 delete_insns_since (last);
2891 }
2892
2893 if (is_a <scalar_int_mode> (mode, &int_mode))
2894 {
2895 temp = widen_bswap (int_mode, op0, target);
2896 if (temp)
2897 return temp;
2898
2899 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (int_mode) == 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD
2900 && optab_handler (unoptab, word_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
2901 {
2902 temp = expand_doubleword_bswap (mode, op0, target);
2903 if (temp)
2904 return temp;
2905 }
2906 }
2907
2908 goto try_libcall;
2909 }
2910
2911 if (CLASS_HAS_WIDER_MODES_P (mclass))
2912 FOR_EACH_WIDER_MODE (wider_mode, mode)
2913 {
2914 if (optab_handler (unoptab, wider_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
2915 {
2916 rtx xop0 = op0;
2917 rtx_insn *last = get_last_insn ();
2918
2919 /* For certain operations, we need not actually extend
2920 the narrow operand, as long as we will truncate the
2921 results to the same narrowness. */
2922
2923 xop0 = widen_operand (xop0, wider_mode, mode, unsignedp,
2924 (unoptab == neg_optab
2925 || unoptab == one_cmpl_optab)
2926 && mclass == MODE_INT);
2927
2928 temp = expand_unop (wider_mode, unoptab, xop0, NULL_RTX,
2929 unsignedp);
2930
2931 if (temp)
2932 {
2933 if (mclass != MODE_INT
2934 || !TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (mode, wider_mode))
2935 {
2936 if (target == 0)
2937 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
2938 convert_move (target, temp, 0);
2939 return target;
2940 }
2941 else
2942 return gen_lowpart (mode, temp);
2943 }
2944 else
2945 delete_insns_since (last);
2946 }
2947 }
2948
2949 /* These can be done a word at a time. */
2950 if (unoptab == one_cmpl_optab
2951 && is_int_mode (mode, &int_mode)
2952 && GET_MODE_SIZE (int_mode) > UNITS_PER_WORD
2953 && optab_handler (unoptab, word_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
2954 {
2955 int i;
2956 rtx_insn *insns;
2957
2958 if (target == 0
2959 || target == op0
2960 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (target, op0)
2961 || !valid_multiword_target_p (target))
2962 target = gen_reg_rtx (int_mode);
2963
2964 start_sequence ();
2965
2966 /* Do the actual arithmetic. */
2967 for (i = 0; i < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (int_mode) / BITS_PER_WORD; i++)
2968 {
2969 rtx target_piece = operand_subword (target, i, 1, int_mode);
2970 rtx x = expand_unop (word_mode, unoptab,
2971 operand_subword_force (op0, i, int_mode),
2972 target_piece, unsignedp);
2973
2974 if (target_piece != x)
2975 emit_move_insn (target_piece, x);
2976 }
2977
2978 insns = get_insns ();
2979 end_sequence ();
2980
2981 emit_insn (insns);
2982 return target;
2983 }
2984
2985 /* Emit ~op0 as op0 ^ -1. */
2986 if (unoptab == one_cmpl_optab
2987 && (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode) || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_VECTOR_INT)
2988 && optab_handler (xor_optab, mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
2989 {
2990 temp = expand_binop (mode, xor_optab, op0, CONSTM1_RTX (mode),
2991 target, unsignedp, OPTAB_DIRECT);
2992 if (temp)
2993 return temp;
2994 }
2995
2996 if (optab_to_code (unoptab) == NEG)
2997 {
2998 /* Try negating floating point values by flipping the sign bit. */
2999 if (is_a <scalar_float_mode> (mode, &float_mode))
3000 {
3001 temp = expand_absneg_bit (NEG, float_mode, op0, target);
3002 if (temp)
3003 return temp;
3004 }
3005
3006 /* If there is no negation pattern, and we have no negative zero,
3007 try subtracting from zero. */
3008 if (!HONOR_SIGNED_ZEROS (mode))
3009 {
3010 temp = expand_binop (mode, (unoptab == negv_optab
3011 ? subv_optab : sub_optab),
3012 CONST0_RTX (mode), op0, target,
3013 unsignedp, OPTAB_DIRECT);
3014 if (temp)
3015 return temp;
3016 }
3017 }
3018
3019 /* Try calculating parity (x) as popcount (x) % 2. */
3020 if (unoptab == parity_optab && is_a <scalar_int_mode> (mode, &int_mode))
3021 {
3022 temp = expand_parity (int_mode, op0, target);
3023 if (temp)
3024 return temp;
3025 }
3026
3027 /* Try implementing ffs (x) in terms of clz (x). */
3028 if (unoptab == ffs_optab && is_a <scalar_int_mode> (mode, &int_mode))
3029 {
3030 temp = expand_ffs (int_mode, op0, target);
3031 if (temp)
3032 return temp;
3033 }
3034
3035 /* Try implementing ctz (x) in terms of clz (x). */
3036 if (unoptab == ctz_optab && is_a <scalar_int_mode> (mode, &int_mode))
3037 {
3038 temp = expand_ctz (int_mode, op0, target);
3039 if (temp)
3040 return temp;
3041 }
3042
3043 try_libcall:
3044 /* Now try a library call in this mode. */
3045 libfunc = optab_libfunc (unoptab, mode);
3046 if (libfunc)
3047 {
3048 rtx_insn *insns;
3049 rtx value;
3050 rtx eq_value;
3051 machine_mode outmode = mode;
3052
3053 /* All of these functions return small values. Thus we choose to
3054 have them return something that isn't a double-word. */
3055 if (unoptab == ffs_optab || unoptab == clz_optab || unoptab == ctz_optab
3056 || unoptab == clrsb_optab || unoptab == popcount_optab
3057 || unoptab == parity_optab)
3058 outmode
3059 = GET_MODE (hard_libcall_value (TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node),
3060 optab_libfunc (unoptab, mode)));
3061
3062 start_sequence ();
3063
3064 /* Pass 1 for NO_QUEUE so we don't lose any increments
3065 if the libcall is cse'd or moved. */
3066 value = emit_library_call_value (libfunc, NULL_RTX, LCT_CONST, outmode,
3067 op0, mode);
3068 insns = get_insns ();
3069 end_sequence ();
3070
3071 target = gen_reg_rtx (outmode);
3072 bool trapv = trapv_unoptab_p (unoptab);
3073 if (trapv)
3074 eq_value = NULL_RTX;
3075 else
3076 {
3077 eq_value = gen_rtx_fmt_e (optab_to_code (unoptab), mode, op0);
3078 if (GET_MODE_UNIT_SIZE (outmode) < GET_MODE_UNIT_SIZE (mode))
3079 eq_value = simplify_gen_unary (TRUNCATE, outmode, eq_value, mode);
3080 else if (GET_MODE_UNIT_SIZE (outmode) > GET_MODE_UNIT_SIZE (mode))
3081 eq_value = simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND,
3082 outmode, eq_value, mode);
3083 }
3084 emit_libcall_block_1 (insns, target, value, eq_value, trapv);
3085
3086 return target;
3087 }
3088
3089 /* It can't be done in this mode. Can we do it in a wider mode? */
3090
3091 if (CLASS_HAS_WIDER_MODES_P (mclass))
3092 {
3093 FOR_EACH_WIDER_MODE (wider_mode, mode)
3094 {
3095 if (optab_handler (unoptab, wider_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing
3096 || optab_libfunc (unoptab, wider_mode))
3097 {
3098 rtx xop0 = op0;
3099 rtx_insn *last = get_last_insn ();
3100
3101 /* For certain operations, we need not actually extend
3102 the narrow operand, as long as we will truncate the
3103 results to the same narrowness. */
3104 xop0 = widen_operand (xop0, wider_mode, mode, unsignedp,
3105 (unoptab == neg_optab
3106 || unoptab == one_cmpl_optab
3107 || unoptab == bswap_optab)
3108 && mclass == MODE_INT);
3109
3110 temp = expand_unop (wider_mode, unoptab, xop0, NULL_RTX,
3111 unsignedp);
3112
3113 /* If we are generating clz using wider mode, adjust the
3114 result. Similarly for clrsb. */
3115 if ((unoptab == clz_optab || unoptab == clrsb_optab)
3116 && temp != 0)
3117 {
3118 scalar_int_mode wider_int_mode
3119 = as_a <scalar_int_mode> (wider_mode);
3120 int_mode = as_a <scalar_int_mode> (mode);
3121 temp = expand_binop
3122 (wider_mode, sub_optab, temp,
3123 gen_int_mode (GET_MODE_PRECISION (wider_int_mode)
3124 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode),
3125 wider_int_mode),
3126 target, true, OPTAB_DIRECT);
3127 }
3128
3129 /* Likewise for bswap. */
3130 if (unoptab == bswap_optab && temp != 0)
3131 {
3132 scalar_int_mode wider_int_mode
3133 = as_a <scalar_int_mode> (wider_mode);
3134 int_mode = as_a <scalar_int_mode> (mode);
3135 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_PRECISION (wider_int_mode)
3136 == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wider_int_mode)
3137 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode)
3138 == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (int_mode));
3139
3140 temp = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, wider_int_mode, temp,
3141 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wider_int_mode)
3142 - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (int_mode),
3143 NULL_RTX, true);
3144 }
3145
3146 if (temp)
3147 {
3148 if (mclass != MODE_INT)
3149 {
3150 if (target == 0)
3151 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
3152 convert_move (target, temp, 0);
3153 return target;
3154 }
3155 else
3156 return gen_lowpart (mode, temp);
3157 }
3158 else
3159 delete_insns_since (last);
3160 }
3161 }
3162 }
3163
3164 /* One final attempt at implementing negation via subtraction,
3165 this time allowing widening of the operand. */
3166 if (optab_to_code (unoptab) == NEG && !HONOR_SIGNED_ZEROS (mode))
3167 {
3168 rtx temp;
3169 temp = expand_binop (mode,
3170 unoptab == negv_optab ? subv_optab : sub_optab,
3171 CONST0_RTX (mode), op0,
3172 target, unsignedp, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
3173 if (temp)
3174 return temp;
3175 }
3176
3177 return 0;
3178 }
3179
3180 /* Emit code to compute the absolute value of OP0, with result to
3181 TARGET if convenient. (TARGET may be 0.) The return value says
3182 where the result actually is to be found.
3183
3184 MODE is the mode of the operand; the mode of the result is
3185 different but can be deduced from MODE.
3186
3187 */
3188
3189 rtx
expand_abs_nojump(machine_mode mode,rtx op0,rtx target,int result_unsignedp)3190 expand_abs_nojump (machine_mode mode, rtx op0, rtx target,
3191 int result_unsignedp)
3192 {
3193 rtx temp;
3194
3195 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT
3196 || ! flag_trapv)
3197 result_unsignedp = 1;
3198
3199 /* First try to do it with a special abs instruction. */
3200 temp = expand_unop (mode, result_unsignedp ? abs_optab : absv_optab,
3201 op0, target, 0);
3202 if (temp != 0)
3203 return temp;
3204
3205 /* For floating point modes, try clearing the sign bit. */
3206 scalar_float_mode float_mode;
3207 if (is_a <scalar_float_mode> (mode, &float_mode))
3208 {
3209 temp = expand_absneg_bit (ABS, float_mode, op0, target);
3210 if (temp)
3211 return temp;
3212 }
3213
3214 /* If we have a MAX insn, we can do this as MAX (x, -x). */
3215 if (optab_handler (smax_optab, mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing
3216 && !HONOR_SIGNED_ZEROS (mode))
3217 {
3218 rtx_insn *last = get_last_insn ();
3219
3220 temp = expand_unop (mode, result_unsignedp ? neg_optab : negv_optab,
3221 op0, NULL_RTX, 0);
3222 if (temp != 0)
3223 temp = expand_binop (mode, smax_optab, op0, temp, target, 0,
3224 OPTAB_WIDEN);
3225
3226 if (temp != 0)
3227 return temp;
3228
3229 delete_insns_since (last);
3230 }
3231
3232 /* If this machine has expensive jumps, we can do integer absolute
3233 value of X as (((signed) x >> (W-1)) ^ x) - ((signed) x >> (W-1)),
3234 where W is the width of MODE. */
3235
3236 scalar_int_mode int_mode;
3237 if (is_int_mode (mode, &int_mode)
3238 && BRANCH_COST (optimize_insn_for_speed_p (),
3239 false) >= 2)
3240 {
3241 rtx extended = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, int_mode, op0,
3242 GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode) - 1,
3243 NULL_RTX, 0);
3244
3245 temp = expand_binop (int_mode, xor_optab, extended, op0, target, 0,
3246 OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
3247 if (temp != 0)
3248 temp = expand_binop (int_mode,
3249 result_unsignedp ? sub_optab : subv_optab,
3250 temp, extended, target, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
3251
3252 if (temp != 0)
3253 return temp;
3254 }
3255
3256 return NULL_RTX;
3257 }
3258
3259 rtx
expand_abs(machine_mode mode,rtx op0,rtx target,int result_unsignedp,int safe)3260 expand_abs (machine_mode mode, rtx op0, rtx target,
3261 int result_unsignedp, int safe)
3262 {
3263 rtx temp;
3264 rtx_code_label *op1;
3265
3266 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT
3267 || ! flag_trapv)
3268 result_unsignedp = 1;
3269
3270 temp = expand_abs_nojump (mode, op0, target, result_unsignedp);
3271 if (temp != 0)
3272 return temp;
3273
3274 /* If that does not win, use conditional jump and negate. */
3275
3276 /* It is safe to use the target if it is the same
3277 as the source if this is also a pseudo register */
3278 if (op0 == target && REG_P (op0)
3279 && REGNO (op0) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
3280 safe = 1;
3281
3282 op1 = gen_label_rtx ();
3283 if (target == 0 || ! safe
3284 || GET_MODE (target) != mode
3285 || (MEM_P (target) && MEM_VOLATILE_P (target))
3286 || (REG_P (target)
3287 && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
3288 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
3289
3290 emit_move_insn (target, op0);
3291 NO_DEFER_POP;
3292
3293 do_compare_rtx_and_jump (target, CONST0_RTX (mode), GE, 0, mode,
3294 NULL_RTX, NULL, op1,
3295 profile_probability::uninitialized ());
3296
3297 op0 = expand_unop (mode, result_unsignedp ? neg_optab : negv_optab,
3298 target, target, 0);
3299 if (op0 != target)
3300 emit_move_insn (target, op0);
3301 emit_label (op1);
3302 OK_DEFER_POP;
3303 return target;
3304 }
3305
3306 /* Emit code to compute the one's complement absolute value of OP0
3307 (if (OP0 < 0) OP0 = ~OP0), with result to TARGET if convenient.
3308 (TARGET may be NULL_RTX.) The return value says where the result
3309 actually is to be found.
3310
3311 MODE is the mode of the operand; the mode of the result is
3312 different but can be deduced from MODE. */
3313
3314 rtx
expand_one_cmpl_abs_nojump(machine_mode mode,rtx op0,rtx target)3315 expand_one_cmpl_abs_nojump (machine_mode mode, rtx op0, rtx target)
3316 {
3317 rtx temp;
3318
3319 /* Not applicable for floating point modes. */
3320 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
3321 return NULL_RTX;
3322
3323 /* If we have a MAX insn, we can do this as MAX (x, ~x). */
3324 if (optab_handler (smax_optab, mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
3325 {
3326 rtx_insn *last = get_last_insn ();
3327
3328 temp = expand_unop (mode, one_cmpl_optab, op0, NULL_RTX, 0);
3329 if (temp != 0)
3330 temp = expand_binop (mode, smax_optab, op0, temp, target, 0,
3331 OPTAB_WIDEN);
3332
3333 if (temp != 0)
3334 return temp;
3335
3336 delete_insns_since (last);
3337 }
3338
3339 /* If this machine has expensive jumps, we can do one's complement
3340 absolute value of X as (((signed) x >> (W-1)) ^ x). */
3341
3342 scalar_int_mode int_mode;
3343 if (is_int_mode (mode, &int_mode)
3344 && BRANCH_COST (optimize_insn_for_speed_p (),
3345 false) >= 2)
3346 {
3347 rtx extended = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, int_mode, op0,
3348 GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode) - 1,
3349 NULL_RTX, 0);
3350
3351 temp = expand_binop (int_mode, xor_optab, extended, op0, target, 0,
3352 OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
3353
3354 if (temp != 0)
3355 return temp;
3356 }
3357
3358 return NULL_RTX;
3359 }
3360
3361 /* A subroutine of expand_copysign, perform the copysign operation using the
3362 abs and neg primitives advertised to exist on the target. The assumption
3363 is that we have a split register file, and leaving op0 in fp registers,
3364 and not playing with subregs so much, will help the register allocator. */
3365
3366 static rtx
expand_copysign_absneg(scalar_float_mode mode,rtx op0,rtx op1,rtx target,int bitpos,bool op0_is_abs)3367 expand_copysign_absneg (scalar_float_mode mode, rtx op0, rtx op1, rtx target,
3368 int bitpos, bool op0_is_abs)
3369 {
3370 scalar_int_mode imode;
3371 enum insn_code icode;
3372 rtx sign;
3373 rtx_code_label *label;
3374
3375 if (target == op1)
3376 target = NULL_RTX;
3377
3378 /* Check if the back end provides an insn that handles signbit for the
3379 argument's mode. */
3380 icode = optab_handler (signbit_optab, mode);
3381 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
3382 {
3383 imode = as_a <scalar_int_mode> (insn_data[(int) icode].operand[0].mode);
3384 sign = gen_reg_rtx (imode);
3385 emit_unop_insn (icode, sign, op1, UNKNOWN);
3386 }
3387 else
3388 {
3389 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD)
3390 {
3391 if (!int_mode_for_mode (mode).exists (&imode))
3392 return NULL_RTX;
3393 op1 = gen_lowpart (imode, op1);
3394 }
3395 else
3396 {
3397 int word;
3398
3399 imode = word_mode;
3400 if (FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
3401 word = (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - bitpos) / BITS_PER_WORD;
3402 else
3403 word = bitpos / BITS_PER_WORD;
3404 bitpos = bitpos % BITS_PER_WORD;
3405 op1 = operand_subword_force (op1, word, mode);
3406 }
3407
3408 wide_int mask = wi::set_bit_in_zero (bitpos, GET_MODE_PRECISION (imode));
3409 sign = expand_binop (imode, and_optab, op1,
3410 immed_wide_int_const (mask, imode),
3411 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
3412 }
3413
3414 if (!op0_is_abs)
3415 {
3416 op0 = expand_unop (mode, abs_optab, op0, target, 0);
3417 if (op0 == NULL)
3418 return NULL_RTX;
3419 target = op0;
3420 }
3421 else
3422 {
3423 if (target == NULL_RTX)
3424 target = copy_to_reg (op0);
3425 else
3426 emit_move_insn (target, op0);
3427 }
3428
3429 label = gen_label_rtx ();
3430 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (sign, const0_rtx, EQ, NULL_RTX, imode, 1, label);
3431
3432 if (CONST_DOUBLE_AS_FLOAT_P (op0))
3433 op0 = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, op0, mode);
3434 else
3435 op0 = expand_unop (mode, neg_optab, op0, target, 0);
3436 if (op0 != target)
3437 emit_move_insn (target, op0);
3438
3439 emit_label (label);
3440
3441 return target;
3442 }
3443
3444
3445 /* A subroutine of expand_copysign, perform the entire copysign operation
3446 with integer bitmasks. BITPOS is the position of the sign bit; OP0_IS_ABS
3447 is true if op0 is known to have its sign bit clear. */
3448
3449 static rtx
expand_copysign_bit(scalar_float_mode mode,rtx op0,rtx op1,rtx target,int bitpos,bool op0_is_abs)3450 expand_copysign_bit (scalar_float_mode mode, rtx op0, rtx op1, rtx target,
3451 int bitpos, bool op0_is_abs)
3452 {
3453 scalar_int_mode imode;
3454 int word, nwords, i;
3455 rtx temp;
3456 rtx_insn *insns;
3457
3458 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD)
3459 {
3460 if (!int_mode_for_mode (mode).exists (&imode))
3461 return NULL_RTX;
3462 word = 0;
3463 nwords = 1;
3464 }
3465 else
3466 {
3467 imode = word_mode;
3468
3469 if (FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
3470 word = (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - bitpos) / BITS_PER_WORD;
3471 else
3472 word = bitpos / BITS_PER_WORD;
3473 bitpos = bitpos % BITS_PER_WORD;
3474 nwords = (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) + BITS_PER_WORD - 1) / BITS_PER_WORD;
3475 }
3476
3477 wide_int mask = wi::set_bit_in_zero (bitpos, GET_MODE_PRECISION (imode));
3478
3479 if (target == 0
3480 || target == op0
3481 || target == op1
3482 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (target, op0)
3483 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (target, op1)
3484 || (nwords > 1 && !valid_multiword_target_p (target)))
3485 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
3486
3487 if (nwords > 1)
3488 {
3489 start_sequence ();
3490
3491 for (i = 0; i < nwords; ++i)
3492 {
3493 rtx targ_piece = operand_subword (target, i, 1, mode);
3494 rtx op0_piece = operand_subword_force (op0, i, mode);
3495
3496 if (i == word)
3497 {
3498 if (!op0_is_abs)
3499 op0_piece
3500 = expand_binop (imode, and_optab, op0_piece,
3501 immed_wide_int_const (~mask, imode),
3502 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
3503 op1 = expand_binop (imode, and_optab,
3504 operand_subword_force (op1, i, mode),
3505 immed_wide_int_const (mask, imode),
3506 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
3507
3508 temp = expand_binop (imode, ior_optab, op0_piece, op1,
3509 targ_piece, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
3510 if (temp != targ_piece)
3511 emit_move_insn (targ_piece, temp);
3512 }
3513 else
3514 emit_move_insn (targ_piece, op0_piece);
3515 }
3516
3517 insns = get_insns ();
3518 end_sequence ();
3519
3520 emit_insn (insns);
3521 }
3522 else
3523 {
3524 op1 = expand_binop (imode, and_optab, gen_lowpart (imode, op1),
3525 immed_wide_int_const (mask, imode),
3526 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
3527
3528 op0 = gen_lowpart (imode, op0);
3529 if (!op0_is_abs)
3530 op0 = expand_binop (imode, and_optab, op0,
3531 immed_wide_int_const (~mask, imode),
3532 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
3533
3534 temp = expand_binop (imode, ior_optab, op0, op1,
3535 gen_lowpart (imode, target), 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
3536 target = lowpart_subreg_maybe_copy (mode, temp, imode);
3537 }
3538
3539 return target;
3540 }
3541
3542 /* Expand the C99 copysign operation. OP0 and OP1 must be the same
3543 scalar floating point mode. Return NULL if we do not know how to
3544 expand the operation inline. */
3545
3546 rtx
expand_copysign(rtx op0,rtx op1,rtx target)3547 expand_copysign (rtx op0, rtx op1, rtx target)
3548 {
3549 scalar_float_mode mode;
3550 const struct real_format *fmt;
3551 bool op0_is_abs;
3552 rtx temp;
3553
3554 mode = as_a <scalar_float_mode> (GET_MODE (op0));
3555 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (op1) == mode);
3556
3557 /* First try to do it with a special instruction. */
3558 temp = expand_binop (mode, copysign_optab, op0, op1,
3559 target, 0, OPTAB_DIRECT);
3560 if (temp)
3561 return temp;
3562
3563 fmt = REAL_MODE_FORMAT (mode);
3564 if (fmt == NULL || !fmt->has_signed_zero)
3565 return NULL_RTX;
3566
3567 op0_is_abs = false;
3568 if (CONST_DOUBLE_AS_FLOAT_P (op0))
3569 {
3570 if (real_isneg (CONST_DOUBLE_REAL_VALUE (op0)))
3571 op0 = simplify_unary_operation (ABS, mode, op0, mode);
3572 op0_is_abs = true;
3573 }
3574
3575 if (fmt->signbit_ro >= 0
3576 && (CONST_DOUBLE_AS_FLOAT_P (op0)
3577 || (optab_handler (neg_optab, mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing
3578 && optab_handler (abs_optab, mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)))
3579 {
3580 temp = expand_copysign_absneg (mode, op0, op1, target,
3581 fmt->signbit_ro, op0_is_abs);
3582 if (temp)
3583 return temp;
3584 }
3585
3586 if (fmt->signbit_rw < 0)
3587 return NULL_RTX;
3588 return expand_copysign_bit (mode, op0, op1, target,
3589 fmt->signbit_rw, op0_is_abs);
3590 }
3591
3592 /* Generate an instruction whose insn-code is INSN_CODE,
3593 with two operands: an output TARGET and an input OP0.
3594 TARGET *must* be nonzero, and the output is always stored there.
3595 CODE is an rtx code such that (CODE OP0) is an rtx that describes
3596 the value that is stored into TARGET.
3597
3598 Return false if expansion failed. */
3599
3600 bool
maybe_emit_unop_insn(enum insn_code icode,rtx target,rtx op0,enum rtx_code code)3601 maybe_emit_unop_insn (enum insn_code icode, rtx target, rtx op0,
3602 enum rtx_code code)
3603 {
3604 class expand_operand ops[2];
3605 rtx_insn *pat;
3606
3607 create_output_operand (&ops[0], target, GET_MODE (target));
3608 create_input_operand (&ops[1], op0, GET_MODE (op0));
3609 pat = maybe_gen_insn (icode, 2, ops);
3610 if (!pat)
3611 return false;
3612
3613 if (INSN_P (pat) && NEXT_INSN (pat) != NULL_RTX
3614 && code != UNKNOWN)
3615 add_equal_note (pat, ops[0].value, code, ops[1].value, NULL_RTX,
3616 GET_MODE (op0));
3617
3618 emit_insn (pat);
3619
3620 if (ops[0].value != target)
3621 emit_move_insn (target, ops[0].value);
3622 return true;
3623 }
3624 /* Generate an instruction whose insn-code is INSN_CODE,
3625 with two operands: an output TARGET and an input OP0.
3626 TARGET *must* be nonzero, and the output is always stored there.
3627 CODE is an rtx code such that (CODE OP0) is an rtx that describes
3628 the value that is stored into TARGET. */
3629
3630 void
emit_unop_insn(enum insn_code icode,rtx target,rtx op0,enum rtx_code code)3631 emit_unop_insn (enum insn_code icode, rtx target, rtx op0, enum rtx_code code)
3632 {
3633 bool ok = maybe_emit_unop_insn (icode, target, op0, code);
3634 gcc_assert (ok);
3635 }
3636
3637 struct no_conflict_data
3638 {
3639 rtx target;
3640 rtx_insn *first, *insn;
3641 bool must_stay;
3642 };
3643
3644 /* Called via note_stores by emit_libcall_block. Set P->must_stay if
3645 the currently examined clobber / store has to stay in the list of
3646 insns that constitute the actual libcall block. */
3647 static void
no_conflict_move_test(rtx dest,const_rtx set,void * p0)3648 no_conflict_move_test (rtx dest, const_rtx set, void *p0)
3649 {
3650 struct no_conflict_data *p= (struct no_conflict_data *) p0;
3651
3652 /* If this inns directly contributes to setting the target, it must stay. */
3653 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (p->target, dest))
3654 p->must_stay = true;
3655 /* If we haven't committed to keeping any other insns in the list yet,
3656 there is nothing more to check. */
3657 else if (p->insn == p->first)
3658 return;
3659 /* If this insn sets / clobbers a register that feeds one of the insns
3660 already in the list, this insn has to stay too. */
3661 else if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (dest, PATTERN (p->first))
3662 || (CALL_P (p->first) && (find_reg_fusage (p->first, USE, dest)))
3663 || reg_used_between_p (dest, p->first, p->insn)
3664 /* Likewise if this insn depends on a register set by a previous
3665 insn in the list, or if it sets a result (presumably a hard
3666 register) that is set or clobbered by a previous insn.
3667 N.B. the modified_*_p (SET_DEST...) tests applied to a MEM
3668 SET_DEST perform the former check on the address, and the latter
3669 check on the MEM. */
3670 || (GET_CODE (set) == SET
3671 && (modified_in_p (SET_SRC (set), p->first)
3672 || modified_in_p (SET_DEST (set), p->first)
3673 || modified_between_p (SET_SRC (set), p->first, p->insn)
3674 || modified_between_p (SET_DEST (set), p->first, p->insn))))
3675 p->must_stay = true;
3676 }
3677
3678
3679 /* Emit code to make a call to a constant function or a library call.
3680
3681 INSNS is a list containing all insns emitted in the call.
3682 These insns leave the result in RESULT. Our block is to copy RESULT
3683 to TARGET, which is logically equivalent to EQUIV.
3684
3685 We first emit any insns that set a pseudo on the assumption that these are
3686 loading constants into registers; doing so allows them to be safely cse'ed
3687 between blocks. Then we emit all the other insns in the block, followed by
3688 an insn to move RESULT to TARGET. This last insn will have a REQ_EQUAL
3689 note with an operand of EQUIV. */
3690
3691 static void
emit_libcall_block_1(rtx_insn * insns,rtx target,rtx result,rtx equiv,bool equiv_may_trap)3692 emit_libcall_block_1 (rtx_insn *insns, rtx target, rtx result, rtx equiv,
3693 bool equiv_may_trap)
3694 {
3695 rtx final_dest = target;
3696 rtx_insn *next, *last, *insn;
3697
3698 /* If this is a reg with REG_USERVAR_P set, then it could possibly turn
3699 into a MEM later. Protect the libcall block from this change. */
3700 if (! REG_P (target) || REG_USERVAR_P (target))
3701 target = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (target));
3702
3703 /* If we're using non-call exceptions, a libcall corresponding to an
3704 operation that may trap may also trap. */
3705 /* ??? See the comment in front of make_reg_eh_region_note. */
3706 if (cfun->can_throw_non_call_exceptions
3707 && (equiv_may_trap || may_trap_p (equiv)))
3708 {
3709 for (insn = insns; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
3710 if (CALL_P (insn))
3711 {
3712 rtx note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EH_REGION, NULL_RTX);
3713 if (note)
3714 {
3715 int lp_nr = INTVAL (XEXP (note, 0));
3716 if (lp_nr == 0 || lp_nr == INT_MIN)
3717 remove_note (insn, note);
3718 }
3719 }
3720 }
3721 else
3722 {
3723 /* Look for any CALL_INSNs in this sequence, and attach a REG_EH_REGION
3724 reg note to indicate that this call cannot throw or execute a nonlocal
3725 goto (unless there is already a REG_EH_REGION note, in which case
3726 we update it). */
3727 for (insn = insns; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
3728 if (CALL_P (insn))
3729 make_reg_eh_region_note_nothrow_nononlocal (insn);
3730 }
3731
3732 /* First emit all insns that set pseudos. Remove them from the list as
3733 we go. Avoid insns that set pseudos which were referenced in previous
3734 insns. These can be generated by move_by_pieces, for example,
3735 to update an address. Similarly, avoid insns that reference things
3736 set in previous insns. */
3737
3738 for (insn = insns; insn; insn = next)
3739 {
3740 rtx set = single_set (insn);
3741
3742 next = NEXT_INSN (insn);
3743
3744 if (set != 0 && REG_P (SET_DEST (set))
3745 && REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
3746 {
3747 struct no_conflict_data data;
3748
3749 data.target = const0_rtx;
3750 data.first = insns;
3751 data.insn = insn;
3752 data.must_stay = 0;
3753 note_stores (insn, no_conflict_move_test, &data);
3754 if (! data.must_stay)
3755 {
3756 if (PREV_INSN (insn))
3757 SET_NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn)) = next;
3758 else
3759 insns = next;
3760
3761 if (next)
3762 SET_PREV_INSN (next) = PREV_INSN (insn);
3763
3764 add_insn (insn);
3765 }
3766 }
3767
3768 /* Some ports use a loop to copy large arguments onto the stack.
3769 Don't move anything outside such a loop. */
3770 if (LABEL_P (insn))
3771 break;
3772 }
3773
3774 /* Write the remaining insns followed by the final copy. */
3775 for (insn = insns; insn; insn = next)
3776 {
3777 next = NEXT_INSN (insn);
3778
3779 add_insn (insn);
3780 }
3781
3782 last = emit_move_insn (target, result);
3783 if (equiv)
3784 set_dst_reg_note (last, REG_EQUAL, copy_rtx (equiv), target);
3785
3786 if (final_dest != target)
3787 emit_move_insn (final_dest, target);
3788 }
3789
3790 void
emit_libcall_block(rtx_insn * insns,rtx target,rtx result,rtx equiv)3791 emit_libcall_block (rtx_insn *insns, rtx target, rtx result, rtx equiv)
3792 {
3793 emit_libcall_block_1 (insns, target, result, equiv, false);
3794 }
3795
3796 /* Nonzero if we can perform a comparison of mode MODE straightforwardly.
3797 PURPOSE describes how this comparison will be used. CODE is the rtx
3798 comparison code we will be using.
3799
3800 ??? Actually, CODE is slightly weaker than that. A target is still
3801 required to implement all of the normal bcc operations, but not
3802 required to implement all (or any) of the unordered bcc operations. */
3803
3804 int
can_compare_p(enum rtx_code code,machine_mode mode,enum can_compare_purpose purpose)3805 can_compare_p (enum rtx_code code, machine_mode mode,
3806 enum can_compare_purpose purpose)
3807 {
3808 rtx test;
3809 test = gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code, mode, const0_rtx, const0_rtx);
3810 do
3811 {
3812 enum insn_code icode;
3813
3814 if (purpose == ccp_jump
3815 && (icode = optab_handler (cbranch_optab, mode)) != CODE_FOR_nothing
3816 && insn_operand_matches (icode, 0, test))
3817 return 1;
3818 if (purpose == ccp_store_flag
3819 && (icode = optab_handler (cstore_optab, mode)) != CODE_FOR_nothing
3820 && insn_operand_matches (icode, 1, test))
3821 return 1;
3822 if (purpose == ccp_cmov
3823 && optab_handler (cmov_optab, mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
3824 return 1;
3825
3826 mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode).else_void ();
3827 PUT_MODE (test, mode);
3828 }
3829 while (mode != VOIDmode);
3830
3831 return 0;
3832 }
3833
3834 /* Return whether the backend can emit a vector comparison for code CODE,
3835 comparing operands of mode CMP_OP_MODE and producing a result with
3836 VALUE_MODE. */
3837
3838 bool
can_vcond_compare_p(enum rtx_code code,machine_mode value_mode,machine_mode cmp_op_mode)3839 can_vcond_compare_p (enum rtx_code code, machine_mode value_mode,
3840 machine_mode cmp_op_mode)
3841 {
3842 enum insn_code icode;
3843 bool unsigned_p = (code == LTU || code == LEU || code == GTU || code == GEU);
3844 rtx reg1 = alloca_raw_REG (cmp_op_mode, LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER + 1);
3845 rtx reg2 = alloca_raw_REG (cmp_op_mode, LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER + 2);
3846 rtx test = alloca_rtx_fmt_ee (code, value_mode, reg1, reg2);
3847
3848 return (icode = get_vcond_icode (value_mode, cmp_op_mode, unsigned_p))
3849 != CODE_FOR_nothing
3850 && insn_operand_matches (icode, 3, test);
3851 }
3852
3853 /* This function is called when we are going to emit a compare instruction that
3854 compares the values found in X and Y, using the rtl operator COMPARISON.
3855
3856 If they have mode BLKmode, then SIZE specifies the size of both operands.
3857
3858 UNSIGNEDP nonzero says that the operands are unsigned;
3859 this matters if they need to be widened (as given by METHODS).
3860
3861 *PTEST is where the resulting comparison RTX is returned or NULL_RTX
3862 if we failed to produce one.
3863
3864 *PMODE is the mode of the inputs (in case they are const_int).
3865
3866 This function performs all the setup necessary so that the caller only has
3867 to emit a single comparison insn. This setup can involve doing a BLKmode
3868 comparison or emitting a library call to perform the comparison if no insn
3869 is available to handle it.
3870 The values which are passed in through pointers can be modified; the caller
3871 should perform the comparison on the modified values. Constant
3872 comparisons must have already been folded. */
3873
3874 static void
prepare_cmp_insn(rtx x,rtx y,enum rtx_code comparison,rtx size,int unsignedp,enum optab_methods methods,rtx * ptest,machine_mode * pmode)3875 prepare_cmp_insn (rtx x, rtx y, enum rtx_code comparison, rtx size,
3876 int unsignedp, enum optab_methods methods,
3877 rtx *ptest, machine_mode *pmode)
3878 {
3879 machine_mode mode = *pmode;
3880 rtx libfunc, test;
3881 machine_mode cmp_mode;
3882 enum mode_class mclass;
3883
3884 /* The other methods are not needed. */
3885 gcc_assert (methods == OPTAB_DIRECT || methods == OPTAB_WIDEN
3886 || methods == OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
3887
3888 if (CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (y))
3889 canonicalize_comparison (mode, &comparison, &y);
3890
3891 /* If we are optimizing, force expensive constants into a register. */
3892 if (CONSTANT_P (x) && optimize
3893 && (rtx_cost (x, mode, COMPARE, 0, optimize_insn_for_speed_p ())
3894 > COSTS_N_INSNS (1))
3895 && can_create_pseudo_p ())
3896 x = force_reg (mode, x);
3897
3898 if (CONSTANT_P (y) && optimize
3899 && (rtx_cost (y, mode, COMPARE, 1, optimize_insn_for_speed_p ())
3900 > COSTS_N_INSNS (1))
3901 && can_create_pseudo_p ())
3902 y = force_reg (mode, y);
3903
3904 #if HAVE_cc0
3905 /* Make sure if we have a canonical comparison. The RTL
3906 documentation states that canonical comparisons are required only
3907 for targets which have cc0. */
3908 gcc_assert (!CONSTANT_P (x) || CONSTANT_P (y));
3909 #endif
3910
3911 /* Don't let both operands fail to indicate the mode. */
3912 if (GET_MODE (x) == VOIDmode && GET_MODE (y) == VOIDmode)
3913 x = force_reg (mode, x);
3914 if (mode == VOIDmode)
3915 mode = GET_MODE (x) != VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (x) : GET_MODE (y);
3916
3917 /* Handle all BLKmode compares. */
3918
3919 if (mode == BLKmode)
3920 {
3921 machine_mode result_mode;
3922 enum insn_code cmp_code;
3923 rtx result;
3924 rtx opalign
3925 = GEN_INT (MIN (MEM_ALIGN (x), MEM_ALIGN (y)) / BITS_PER_UNIT);
3926
3927 gcc_assert (size);
3928
3929 /* Try to use a memory block compare insn - either cmpstr
3930 or cmpmem will do. */
3931 opt_scalar_int_mode cmp_mode_iter;
3932 FOR_EACH_MODE_IN_CLASS (cmp_mode_iter, MODE_INT)
3933 {
3934 scalar_int_mode cmp_mode = cmp_mode_iter.require ();
3935 cmp_code = direct_optab_handler (cmpmem_optab, cmp_mode);
3936 if (cmp_code == CODE_FOR_nothing)
3937 cmp_code = direct_optab_handler (cmpstr_optab, cmp_mode);
3938 if (cmp_code == CODE_FOR_nothing)
3939 cmp_code = direct_optab_handler (cmpstrn_optab, cmp_mode);
3940 if (cmp_code == CODE_FOR_nothing)
3941 continue;
3942
3943 /* Must make sure the size fits the insn's mode. */
3944 if (CONST_INT_P (size)
3945 ? UINTVAL (size) > GET_MODE_MASK (cmp_mode)
3946 : (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (as_a <scalar_int_mode> (GET_MODE (size)))
3947 > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (cmp_mode)))
3948 continue;
3949
3950 result_mode = insn_data[cmp_code].operand[0].mode;
3951 result = gen_reg_rtx (result_mode);
3952 size = convert_to_mode (cmp_mode, size, 1);
3953 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (cmp_code) (result, x, y, size, opalign));
3954
3955 *ptest = gen_rtx_fmt_ee (comparison, VOIDmode, result, const0_rtx);
3956 *pmode = result_mode;
3957 return;
3958 }
3959
3960 if (methods != OPTAB_LIB && methods != OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN)
3961 goto fail;
3962
3963 /* Otherwise call a library function. */
3964 result = emit_block_comp_via_libcall (x, y, size);
3965
3966 x = result;
3967 y = const0_rtx;
3968 mode = TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node);
3969 methods = OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN;
3970 unsignedp = false;
3971 }
3972
3973 /* Don't allow operands to the compare to trap, as that can put the
3974 compare and branch in different basic blocks. */
3975 if (cfun->can_throw_non_call_exceptions)
3976 {
3977 if (!can_create_pseudo_p () && (may_trap_p (x) || may_trap_p (y)))
3978 goto fail;
3979 if (may_trap_p (x))
3980 x = copy_to_reg (x);
3981 if (may_trap_p (y))
3982 y = copy_to_reg (y);
3983 }
3984
3985 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_CC)
3986 {
3987 enum insn_code icode = optab_handler (cbranch_optab, CCmode);
3988 test = gen_rtx_fmt_ee (comparison, VOIDmode, x, y);
3989 gcc_assert (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing
3990 && insn_operand_matches (icode, 0, test));
3991 *ptest = test;
3992 return;
3993 }
3994
3995 mclass = GET_MODE_CLASS (mode);
3996 test = gen_rtx_fmt_ee (comparison, VOIDmode, x, y);
3997 FOR_EACH_MODE_FROM (cmp_mode, mode)
3998 {
3999 enum insn_code icode;
4000 icode = optab_handler (cbranch_optab, cmp_mode);
4001 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing
4002 && insn_operand_matches (icode, 0, test))
4003 {
4004 rtx_insn *last = get_last_insn ();
4005 rtx op0 = prepare_operand (icode, x, 1, mode, cmp_mode, unsignedp);
4006 rtx op1 = prepare_operand (icode, y, 2, mode, cmp_mode, unsignedp);
4007 if (op0 && op1
4008 && insn_operand_matches (icode, 1, op0)
4009 && insn_operand_matches (icode, 2, op1))
4010 {
4011 XEXP (test, 0) = op0;
4012 XEXP (test, 1) = op1;
4013 *ptest = test;
4014 *pmode = cmp_mode;
4015 return;
4016 }
4017 delete_insns_since (last);
4018 }
4019
4020 if (methods == OPTAB_DIRECT || !CLASS_HAS_WIDER_MODES_P (mclass))
4021 break;
4022 }
4023
4024 if (methods != OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN)
4025 goto fail;
4026
4027 if (SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
4028 {
4029 /* Small trick if UNORDERED isn't implemented by the hardware. */
4030 if (comparison == UNORDERED && rtx_equal_p (x, y))
4031 {
4032 prepare_cmp_insn (x, y, UNLT, NULL_RTX, unsignedp, OPTAB_WIDEN,
4033 ptest, pmode);
4034 if (*ptest)
4035 return;
4036 }
4037
4038 prepare_float_lib_cmp (x, y, comparison, ptest, pmode);
4039 }
4040 else
4041 {
4042 rtx result;
4043 machine_mode ret_mode;
4044
4045 /* Handle a libcall just for the mode we are using. */
4046 libfunc = optab_libfunc (cmp_optab, mode);
4047 gcc_assert (libfunc);
4048
4049 /* If we want unsigned, and this mode has a distinct unsigned
4050 comparison routine, use that. */
4051 if (unsignedp)
4052 {
4053 rtx ulibfunc = optab_libfunc (ucmp_optab, mode);
4054 if (ulibfunc)
4055 libfunc = ulibfunc;
4056 }
4057
4058 ret_mode = targetm.libgcc_cmp_return_mode ();
4059 result = emit_library_call_value (libfunc, NULL_RTX, LCT_CONST,
4060 ret_mode, x, mode, y, mode);
4061
4062 /* There are two kinds of comparison routines. Biased routines
4063 return 0/1/2, and unbiased routines return -1/0/1. Other parts
4064 of gcc expect that the comparison operation is equivalent
4065 to the modified comparison. For signed comparisons compare the
4066 result against 1 in the biased case, and zero in the unbiased
4067 case. For unsigned comparisons always compare against 1 after
4068 biasing the unbiased result by adding 1. This gives us a way to
4069 represent LTU.
4070 The comparisons in the fixed-point helper library are always
4071 biased. */
4072 x = result;
4073 y = const1_rtx;
4074
4075 if (!TARGET_LIB_INT_CMP_BIASED && !ALL_FIXED_POINT_MODE_P (mode))
4076 {
4077 if (unsignedp)
4078 x = plus_constant (ret_mode, result, 1);
4079 else
4080 y = const0_rtx;
4081 }
4082
4083 *pmode = ret_mode;
4084 prepare_cmp_insn (x, y, comparison, NULL_RTX, unsignedp, methods,
4085 ptest, pmode);
4086 }
4087
4088 return;
4089
4090 fail:
4091 *ptest = NULL_RTX;
4092 }
4093
4094 /* Before emitting an insn with code ICODE, make sure that X, which is going
4095 to be used for operand OPNUM of the insn, is converted from mode MODE to
4096 WIDER_MODE (UNSIGNEDP determines whether it is an unsigned conversion), and
4097 that it is accepted by the operand predicate. Return the new value. */
4098
4099 rtx
prepare_operand(enum insn_code icode,rtx x,int opnum,machine_mode mode,machine_mode wider_mode,int unsignedp)4100 prepare_operand (enum insn_code icode, rtx x, int opnum, machine_mode mode,
4101 machine_mode wider_mode, int unsignedp)
4102 {
4103 if (mode != wider_mode)
4104 x = convert_modes (wider_mode, mode, x, unsignedp);
4105
4106 if (!insn_operand_matches (icode, opnum, x))
4107 {
4108 machine_mode op_mode = insn_data[(int) icode].operand[opnum].mode;
4109 if (reload_completed)
4110 return NULL_RTX;
4111 if (GET_MODE (x) != op_mode && GET_MODE (x) != VOIDmode)
4112 return NULL_RTX;
4113 x = copy_to_mode_reg (op_mode, x);
4114 }
4115
4116 return x;
4117 }
4118
4119 /* Subroutine of emit_cmp_and_jump_insns; this function is called when we know
4120 we can do the branch. */
4121
4122 static void
emit_cmp_and_jump_insn_1(rtx test,machine_mode mode,rtx label,profile_probability prob)4123 emit_cmp_and_jump_insn_1 (rtx test, machine_mode mode, rtx label,
4124 profile_probability prob)
4125 {
4126 machine_mode optab_mode;
4127 enum mode_class mclass;
4128 enum insn_code icode;
4129 rtx_insn *insn;
4130
4131 mclass = GET_MODE_CLASS (mode);
4132 optab_mode = (mclass == MODE_CC) ? CCmode : mode;
4133 icode = optab_handler (cbranch_optab, optab_mode);
4134
4135 gcc_assert (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing);
4136 gcc_assert (insn_operand_matches (icode, 0, test));
4137 insn = emit_jump_insn (GEN_FCN (icode) (test, XEXP (test, 0),
4138 XEXP (test, 1), label));
4139 if (prob.initialized_p ()
4140 && profile_status_for_fn (cfun) != PROFILE_ABSENT
4141 && insn
4142 && JUMP_P (insn)
4143 && any_condjump_p (insn)
4144 && !find_reg_note (insn, REG_BR_PROB, 0))
4145 add_reg_br_prob_note (insn, prob);
4146 }
4147
4148 /* Generate code to compare X with Y so that the condition codes are
4149 set and to jump to LABEL if the condition is true. If X is a
4150 constant and Y is not a constant, then the comparison is swapped to
4151 ensure that the comparison RTL has the canonical form.
4152
4153 UNSIGNEDP nonzero says that X and Y are unsigned; this matters if they
4154 need to be widened. UNSIGNEDP is also used to select the proper
4155 branch condition code.
4156
4157 If X and Y have mode BLKmode, then SIZE specifies the size of both X and Y.
4158
4159 MODE is the mode of the inputs (in case they are const_int).
4160
4161 COMPARISON is the rtl operator to compare with (EQ, NE, GT, etc.).
4162 It will be potentially converted into an unsigned variant based on
4163 UNSIGNEDP to select a proper jump instruction.
4164
4165 PROB is the probability of jumping to LABEL. */
4166
4167 void
emit_cmp_and_jump_insns(rtx x,rtx y,enum rtx_code comparison,rtx size,machine_mode mode,int unsignedp,rtx label,profile_probability prob)4168 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (rtx x, rtx y, enum rtx_code comparison, rtx size,
4169 machine_mode mode, int unsignedp, rtx label,
4170 profile_probability prob)
4171 {
4172 rtx op0 = x, op1 = y;
4173 rtx test;
4174
4175 /* Swap operands and condition to ensure canonical RTL. */
4176 if (swap_commutative_operands_p (x, y)
4177 && can_compare_p (swap_condition (comparison), mode, ccp_jump))
4178 {
4179 op0 = y, op1 = x;
4180 comparison = swap_condition (comparison);
4181 }
4182
4183 /* If OP0 is still a constant, then both X and Y must be constants
4184 or the opposite comparison is not supported. Force X into a register
4185 to create canonical RTL. */
4186 if (CONSTANT_P (op0))
4187 op0 = force_reg (mode, op0);
4188
4189 if (unsignedp)
4190 comparison = unsigned_condition (comparison);
4191
4192 prepare_cmp_insn (op0, op1, comparison, size, unsignedp, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN,
4193 &test, &mode);
4194 emit_cmp_and_jump_insn_1 (test, mode, label, prob);
4195 }
4196
4197
4198 /* Emit a library call comparison between floating point X and Y.
4199 COMPARISON is the rtl operator to compare with (EQ, NE, GT, etc.). */
4200
4201 static void
prepare_float_lib_cmp(rtx x,rtx y,enum rtx_code comparison,rtx * ptest,machine_mode * pmode)4202 prepare_float_lib_cmp (rtx x, rtx y, enum rtx_code comparison,
4203 rtx *ptest, machine_mode *pmode)
4204 {
4205 enum rtx_code swapped = swap_condition (comparison);
4206 enum rtx_code reversed = reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (comparison);
4207 machine_mode orig_mode = GET_MODE (x);
4208 machine_mode mode;
4209 rtx true_rtx, false_rtx;
4210 rtx value, target, equiv;
4211 rtx_insn *insns;
4212 rtx libfunc = 0;
4213 bool reversed_p = false;
4214 scalar_int_mode cmp_mode = targetm.libgcc_cmp_return_mode ();
4215
4216 FOR_EACH_MODE_FROM (mode, orig_mode)
4217 {
4218 if (code_to_optab (comparison)
4219 && (libfunc = optab_libfunc (code_to_optab (comparison), mode)))
4220 break;
4221
4222 if (code_to_optab (swapped)
4223 && (libfunc = optab_libfunc (code_to_optab (swapped), mode)))
4224 {
4225 std::swap (x, y);
4226 comparison = swapped;
4227 break;
4228 }
4229
4230 if (code_to_optab (reversed)
4231 && (libfunc = optab_libfunc (code_to_optab (reversed), mode)))
4232 {
4233 comparison = reversed;
4234 reversed_p = true;
4235 break;
4236 }
4237 }
4238
4239 gcc_assert (mode != VOIDmode);
4240
4241 if (mode != orig_mode)
4242 {
4243 x = convert_to_mode (mode, x, 0);
4244 y = convert_to_mode (mode, y, 0);
4245 }
4246
4247 /* Attach a REG_EQUAL note describing the semantics of the libcall to
4248 the RTL. The allows the RTL optimizers to delete the libcall if the
4249 condition can be determined at compile-time. */
4250 if (comparison == UNORDERED
4251 || FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (mode, comparison))
4252 {
4253 true_rtx = const_true_rtx;
4254 false_rtx = const0_rtx;
4255 }
4256 else
4257 {
4258 switch (comparison)
4259 {
4260 case EQ:
4261 true_rtx = const0_rtx;
4262 false_rtx = const_true_rtx;
4263 break;
4264
4265 case NE:
4266 true_rtx = const_true_rtx;
4267 false_rtx = const0_rtx;
4268 break;
4269
4270 case GT:
4271 true_rtx = const1_rtx;
4272 false_rtx = const0_rtx;
4273 break;
4274
4275 case GE:
4276 true_rtx = const0_rtx;
4277 false_rtx = constm1_rtx;
4278 break;
4279
4280 case LT:
4281 true_rtx = constm1_rtx;
4282 false_rtx = const0_rtx;
4283 break;
4284
4285 case LE:
4286 true_rtx = const0_rtx;
4287 false_rtx = const1_rtx;
4288 break;
4289
4290 default:
4291 gcc_unreachable ();
4292 }
4293 }
4294
4295 if (comparison == UNORDERED)
4296 {
4297 rtx temp = simplify_gen_relational (NE, cmp_mode, mode, x, x);
4298 equiv = simplify_gen_relational (NE, cmp_mode, mode, y, y);
4299 equiv = simplify_gen_ternary (IF_THEN_ELSE, cmp_mode, cmp_mode,
4300 temp, const_true_rtx, equiv);
4301 }
4302 else
4303 {
4304 equiv = simplify_gen_relational (comparison, cmp_mode, mode, x, y);
4305 if (! FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (mode, comparison))
4306 equiv = simplify_gen_ternary (IF_THEN_ELSE, cmp_mode, cmp_mode,
4307 equiv, true_rtx, false_rtx);
4308 }
4309
4310 start_sequence ();
4311 value = emit_library_call_value (libfunc, NULL_RTX, LCT_CONST,
4312 cmp_mode, x, mode, y, mode);
4313 insns = get_insns ();
4314 end_sequence ();
4315
4316 target = gen_reg_rtx (cmp_mode);
4317 emit_libcall_block (insns, target, value, equiv);
4318
4319 if (comparison == UNORDERED
4320 || FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (mode, comparison)
4321 || reversed_p)
4322 *ptest = gen_rtx_fmt_ee (reversed_p ? EQ : NE, VOIDmode, target, false_rtx);
4323 else
4324 *ptest = gen_rtx_fmt_ee (comparison, VOIDmode, target, const0_rtx);
4325
4326 *pmode = cmp_mode;
4327 }
4328
4329 /* Generate code to indirectly jump to a location given in the rtx LOC. */
4330
4331 void
emit_indirect_jump(rtx loc)4332 emit_indirect_jump (rtx loc)
4333 {
4334 if (!targetm.have_indirect_jump ())
4335 sorry ("indirect jumps are not available on this target");
4336 else
4337 {
4338 class expand_operand ops[1];
4339 create_address_operand (&ops[0], loc);
4340 expand_jump_insn (targetm.code_for_indirect_jump, 1, ops);
4341 emit_barrier ();
4342 }
4343 }
4344
4345
4346 /* Emit a conditional move instruction if the machine supports one for that
4347 condition and machine mode.
4348
4349 OP0 and OP1 are the operands that should be compared using CODE. CMODE is
4350 the mode to use should they be constants. If it is VOIDmode, they cannot
4351 both be constants.
4352
4353 OP2 should be stored in TARGET if the comparison is true, otherwise OP3
4354 should be stored there. MODE is the mode to use should they be constants.
4355 If it is VOIDmode, they cannot both be constants.
4356
4357 The result is either TARGET (perhaps modified) or NULL_RTX if the operation
4358 is not supported. */
4359
4360 rtx
emit_conditional_move(rtx target,enum rtx_code code,rtx op0,rtx op1,machine_mode cmode,rtx op2,rtx op3,machine_mode mode,int unsignedp)4361 emit_conditional_move (rtx target, enum rtx_code code, rtx op0, rtx op1,
4362 machine_mode cmode, rtx op2, rtx op3,
4363 machine_mode mode, int unsignedp)
4364 {
4365 rtx comparison;
4366 rtx_insn *last;
4367 enum insn_code icode;
4368 enum rtx_code reversed;
4369
4370 /* If the two source operands are identical, that's just a move. */
4371
4372 if (rtx_equal_p (op2, op3))
4373 {
4374 if (!target)
4375 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
4376
4377 emit_move_insn (target, op3);
4378 return target;
4379 }
4380
4381 /* If one operand is constant, make it the second one. Only do this
4382 if the other operand is not constant as well. */
4383
4384 if (swap_commutative_operands_p (op0, op1))
4385 {
4386 std::swap (op0, op1);
4387 code = swap_condition (code);
4388 }
4389
4390 /* get_condition will prefer to generate LT and GT even if the old
4391 comparison was against zero, so undo that canonicalization here since
4392 comparisons against zero are cheaper. */
4393 if (code == LT && op1 == const1_rtx)
4394 code = LE, op1 = const0_rtx;
4395 else if (code == GT && op1 == constm1_rtx)
4396 code = GE, op1 = const0_rtx;
4397
4398 if (cmode == VOIDmode)
4399 cmode = GET_MODE (op0);
4400
4401 enum rtx_code orig_code = code;
4402 bool swapped = false;
4403 if (swap_commutative_operands_p (op2, op3)
4404 && ((reversed = reversed_comparison_code_parts (code, op0, op1, NULL))
4405 != UNKNOWN))
4406 {
4407 std::swap (op2, op3);
4408 code = reversed;
4409 swapped = true;
4410 }
4411
4412 if (mode == VOIDmode)
4413 mode = GET_MODE (op2);
4414
4415 icode = direct_optab_handler (movcc_optab, mode);
4416
4417 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing)
4418 return NULL_RTX;
4419
4420 if (!target)
4421 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
4422
4423 for (int pass = 0; ; pass++)
4424 {
4425 code = unsignedp ? unsigned_condition (code) : code;
4426 comparison = simplify_gen_relational (code, VOIDmode, cmode, op0, op1);
4427
4428 /* We can get const0_rtx or const_true_rtx in some circumstances. Just
4429 punt and let the caller figure out how best to deal with this
4430 situation. */
4431 if (COMPARISON_P (comparison))
4432 {
4433 saved_pending_stack_adjust save;
4434 save_pending_stack_adjust (&save);
4435 last = get_last_insn ();
4436 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
4437 machine_mode cmpmode = cmode;
4438 prepare_cmp_insn (XEXP (comparison, 0), XEXP (comparison, 1),
4439 GET_CODE (comparison), NULL_RTX, unsignedp,
4440 OPTAB_WIDEN, &comparison, &cmpmode);
4441 if (comparison)
4442 {
4443 class expand_operand ops[4];
4444
4445 create_output_operand (&ops[0], target, mode);
4446 create_fixed_operand (&ops[1], comparison);
4447 create_input_operand (&ops[2], op2, mode);
4448 create_input_operand (&ops[3], op3, mode);
4449 if (maybe_expand_insn (icode, 4, ops))
4450 {
4451 if (ops[0].value != target)
4452 convert_move (target, ops[0].value, false);
4453 return target;
4454 }
4455 }
4456 delete_insns_since (last);
4457 restore_pending_stack_adjust (&save);
4458 }
4459
4460 if (pass == 1)
4461 return NULL_RTX;
4462
4463 /* If the preferred op2/op3 order is not usable, retry with other
4464 operand order, perhaps it will expand successfully. */
4465 if (swapped)
4466 code = orig_code;
4467 else if ((reversed = reversed_comparison_code_parts (orig_code, op0, op1,
4468 NULL))
4469 != UNKNOWN)
4470 code = reversed;
4471 else
4472 return NULL_RTX;
4473 std::swap (op2, op3);
4474 }
4475 }
4476
4477
4478 /* Emit a conditional negate or bitwise complement using the
4479 negcc or notcc optabs if available. Return NULL_RTX if such operations
4480 are not available. Otherwise return the RTX holding the result.
4481 TARGET is the desired destination of the result. COMP is the comparison
4482 on which to negate. If COND is true move into TARGET the negation
4483 or bitwise complement of OP1. Otherwise move OP2 into TARGET.
4484 CODE is either NEG or NOT. MODE is the machine mode in which the
4485 operation is performed. */
4486
4487 rtx
emit_conditional_neg_or_complement(rtx target,rtx_code code,machine_mode mode,rtx cond,rtx op1,rtx op2)4488 emit_conditional_neg_or_complement (rtx target, rtx_code code,
4489 machine_mode mode, rtx cond, rtx op1,
4490 rtx op2)
4491 {
4492 optab op = unknown_optab;
4493 if (code == NEG)
4494 op = negcc_optab;
4495 else if (code == NOT)
4496 op = notcc_optab;
4497 else
4498 gcc_unreachable ();
4499
4500 insn_code icode = direct_optab_handler (op, mode);
4501
4502 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing)
4503 return NULL_RTX;
4504
4505 if (!target)
4506 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
4507
4508 rtx_insn *last = get_last_insn ();
4509 class expand_operand ops[4];
4510
4511 create_output_operand (&ops[0], target, mode);
4512 create_fixed_operand (&ops[1], cond);
4513 create_input_operand (&ops[2], op1, mode);
4514 create_input_operand (&ops[3], op2, mode);
4515
4516 if (maybe_expand_insn (icode, 4, ops))
4517 {
4518 if (ops[0].value != target)
4519 convert_move (target, ops[0].value, false);
4520
4521 return target;
4522 }
4523 delete_insns_since (last);
4524 return NULL_RTX;
4525 }
4526
4527 /* Emit a conditional addition instruction if the machine supports one for that
4528 condition and machine mode.
4529
4530 OP0 and OP1 are the operands that should be compared using CODE. CMODE is
4531 the mode to use should they be constants. If it is VOIDmode, they cannot
4532 both be constants.
4533
4534 OP2 should be stored in TARGET if the comparison is false, otherwise OP2+OP3
4535 should be stored there. MODE is the mode to use should they be constants.
4536 If it is VOIDmode, they cannot both be constants.
4537
4538 The result is either TARGET (perhaps modified) or NULL_RTX if the operation
4539 is not supported. */
4540
4541 rtx
emit_conditional_add(rtx target,enum rtx_code code,rtx op0,rtx op1,machine_mode cmode,rtx op2,rtx op3,machine_mode mode,int unsignedp)4542 emit_conditional_add (rtx target, enum rtx_code code, rtx op0, rtx op1,
4543 machine_mode cmode, rtx op2, rtx op3,
4544 machine_mode mode, int unsignedp)
4545 {
4546 rtx comparison;
4547 rtx_insn *last;
4548 enum insn_code icode;
4549
4550 /* If one operand is constant, make it the second one. Only do this
4551 if the other operand is not constant as well. */
4552
4553 if (swap_commutative_operands_p (op0, op1))
4554 {
4555 std::swap (op0, op1);
4556 code = swap_condition (code);
4557 }
4558
4559 /* get_condition will prefer to generate LT and GT even if the old
4560 comparison was against zero, so undo that canonicalization here since
4561 comparisons against zero are cheaper. */
4562 if (code == LT && op1 == const1_rtx)
4563 code = LE, op1 = const0_rtx;
4564 else if (code == GT && op1 == constm1_rtx)
4565 code = GE, op1 = const0_rtx;
4566
4567 if (cmode == VOIDmode)
4568 cmode = GET_MODE (op0);
4569
4570 if (mode == VOIDmode)
4571 mode = GET_MODE (op2);
4572
4573 icode = optab_handler (addcc_optab, mode);
4574
4575 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing)
4576 return 0;
4577
4578 if (!target)
4579 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
4580
4581 code = unsignedp ? unsigned_condition (code) : code;
4582 comparison = simplify_gen_relational (code, VOIDmode, cmode, op0, op1);
4583
4584 /* We can get const0_rtx or const_true_rtx in some circumstances. Just
4585 return NULL and let the caller figure out how best to deal with this
4586 situation. */
4587 if (!COMPARISON_P (comparison))
4588 return NULL_RTX;
4589
4590 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
4591 last = get_last_insn ();
4592 prepare_cmp_insn (XEXP (comparison, 0), XEXP (comparison, 1),
4593 GET_CODE (comparison), NULL_RTX, unsignedp, OPTAB_WIDEN,
4594 &comparison, &cmode);
4595 if (comparison)
4596 {
4597 class expand_operand ops[4];
4598
4599 create_output_operand (&ops[0], target, mode);
4600 create_fixed_operand (&ops[1], comparison);
4601 create_input_operand (&ops[2], op2, mode);
4602 create_input_operand (&ops[3], op3, mode);
4603 if (maybe_expand_insn (icode, 4, ops))
4604 {
4605 if (ops[0].value != target)
4606 convert_move (target, ops[0].value, false);
4607 return target;
4608 }
4609 }
4610 delete_insns_since (last);
4611 return NULL_RTX;
4612 }
4613
4614 /* These functions attempt to generate an insn body, rather than
4615 emitting the insn, but if the gen function already emits them, we
4616 make no attempt to turn them back into naked patterns. */
4617
4618 /* Generate and return an insn body to add Y to X. */
4619
4620 rtx_insn *
gen_add2_insn(rtx x,rtx y)4621 gen_add2_insn (rtx x, rtx y)
4622 {
4623 enum insn_code icode = optab_handler (add_optab, GET_MODE (x));
4624
4625 gcc_assert (insn_operand_matches (icode, 0, x));
4626 gcc_assert (insn_operand_matches (icode, 1, x));
4627 gcc_assert (insn_operand_matches (icode, 2, y));
4628
4629 return GEN_FCN (icode) (x, x, y);
4630 }
4631
4632 /* Generate and return an insn body to add r1 and c,
4633 storing the result in r0. */
4634
4635 rtx_insn *
gen_add3_insn(rtx r0,rtx r1,rtx c)4636 gen_add3_insn (rtx r0, rtx r1, rtx c)
4637 {
4638 enum insn_code icode = optab_handler (add_optab, GET_MODE (r0));
4639
4640 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing
4641 || !insn_operand_matches (icode, 0, r0)
4642 || !insn_operand_matches (icode, 1, r1)
4643 || !insn_operand_matches (icode, 2, c))
4644 return NULL;
4645
4646 return GEN_FCN (icode) (r0, r1, c);
4647 }
4648
4649 int
have_add2_insn(rtx x,rtx y)4650 have_add2_insn (rtx x, rtx y)
4651 {
4652 enum insn_code icode;
4653
4654 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (x) != VOIDmode);
4655
4656 icode = optab_handler (add_optab, GET_MODE (x));
4657
4658 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing)
4659 return 0;
4660
4661 if (!insn_operand_matches (icode, 0, x)
4662 || !insn_operand_matches (icode, 1, x)
4663 || !insn_operand_matches (icode, 2, y))
4664 return 0;
4665
4666 return 1;
4667 }
4668
4669 /* Generate and return an insn body to add Y to X. */
4670
4671 rtx_insn *
gen_addptr3_insn(rtx x,rtx y,rtx z)4672 gen_addptr3_insn (rtx x, rtx y, rtx z)
4673 {
4674 enum insn_code icode = optab_handler (addptr3_optab, GET_MODE (x));
4675
4676 gcc_assert (insn_operand_matches (icode, 0, x));
4677 gcc_assert (insn_operand_matches (icode, 1, y));
4678 gcc_assert (insn_operand_matches (icode, 2, z));
4679
4680 return GEN_FCN (icode) (x, y, z);
4681 }
4682
4683 /* Return true if the target implements an addptr pattern and X, Y,
4684 and Z are valid for the pattern predicates. */
4685
4686 int
have_addptr3_insn(rtx x,rtx y,rtx z)4687 have_addptr3_insn (rtx x, rtx y, rtx z)
4688 {
4689 enum insn_code icode;
4690
4691 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (x) != VOIDmode);
4692
4693 icode = optab_handler (addptr3_optab, GET_MODE (x));
4694
4695 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing)
4696 return 0;
4697
4698 if (!insn_operand_matches (icode, 0, x)
4699 || !insn_operand_matches (icode, 1, y)
4700 || !insn_operand_matches (icode, 2, z))
4701 return 0;
4702
4703 return 1;
4704 }
4705
4706 /* Generate and return an insn body to subtract Y from X. */
4707
4708 rtx_insn *
gen_sub2_insn(rtx x,rtx y)4709 gen_sub2_insn (rtx x, rtx y)
4710 {
4711 enum insn_code icode = optab_handler (sub_optab, GET_MODE (x));
4712
4713 gcc_assert (insn_operand_matches (icode, 0, x));
4714 gcc_assert (insn_operand_matches (icode, 1, x));
4715 gcc_assert (insn_operand_matches (icode, 2, y));
4716
4717 return GEN_FCN (icode) (x, x, y);
4718 }
4719
4720 /* Generate and return an insn body to subtract r1 and c,
4721 storing the result in r0. */
4722
4723 rtx_insn *
gen_sub3_insn(rtx r0,rtx r1,rtx c)4724 gen_sub3_insn (rtx r0, rtx r1, rtx c)
4725 {
4726 enum insn_code icode = optab_handler (sub_optab, GET_MODE (r0));
4727
4728 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing
4729 || !insn_operand_matches (icode, 0, r0)
4730 || !insn_operand_matches (icode, 1, r1)
4731 || !insn_operand_matches (icode, 2, c))
4732 return NULL;
4733
4734 return GEN_FCN (icode) (r0, r1, c);
4735 }
4736
4737 int
have_sub2_insn(rtx x,rtx y)4738 have_sub2_insn (rtx x, rtx y)
4739 {
4740 enum insn_code icode;
4741
4742 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (x) != VOIDmode);
4743
4744 icode = optab_handler (sub_optab, GET_MODE (x));
4745
4746 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing)
4747 return 0;
4748
4749 if (!insn_operand_matches (icode, 0, x)
4750 || !insn_operand_matches (icode, 1, x)
4751 || !insn_operand_matches (icode, 2, y))
4752 return 0;
4753
4754 return 1;
4755 }
4756
4757 /* Generate the body of an insn to extend Y (with mode MFROM)
4758 into X (with mode MTO). Do zero-extension if UNSIGNEDP is nonzero. */
4759
4760 rtx_insn *
gen_extend_insn(rtx x,rtx y,machine_mode mto,machine_mode mfrom,int unsignedp)4761 gen_extend_insn (rtx x, rtx y, machine_mode mto,
4762 machine_mode mfrom, int unsignedp)
4763 {
4764 enum insn_code icode = can_extend_p (mto, mfrom, unsignedp);
4765 return GEN_FCN (icode) (x, y);
4766 }
4767
4768 /* Generate code to convert FROM to floating point
4769 and store in TO. FROM must be fixed point and not VOIDmode.
4770 UNSIGNEDP nonzero means regard FROM as unsigned.
4771 Normally this is done by correcting the final value
4772 if it is negative. */
4773
4774 void
expand_float(rtx to,rtx from,int unsignedp)4775 expand_float (rtx to, rtx from, int unsignedp)
4776 {
4777 enum insn_code icode;
4778 rtx target = to;
4779 scalar_mode from_mode, to_mode;
4780 machine_mode fmode, imode;
4781 bool can_do_signed = false;
4782
4783 /* Crash now, because we won't be able to decide which mode to use. */
4784 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (from) != VOIDmode);
4785
4786 /* Look for an insn to do the conversion. Do it in the specified
4787 modes if possible; otherwise convert either input, output or both to
4788 wider mode. If the integer mode is wider than the mode of FROM,
4789 we can do the conversion signed even if the input is unsigned. */
4790
4791 FOR_EACH_MODE_FROM (fmode, GET_MODE (to))
4792 FOR_EACH_MODE_FROM (imode, GET_MODE (from))
4793 {
4794 int doing_unsigned = unsignedp;
4795
4796 if (fmode != GET_MODE (to)
4797 && (significand_size (fmode)
4798 < GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (GET_MODE (from))))
4799 continue;
4800
4801 icode = can_float_p (fmode, imode, unsignedp);
4802 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing && unsignedp)
4803 {
4804 enum insn_code scode = can_float_p (fmode, imode, 0);
4805 if (scode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
4806 can_do_signed = true;
4807 if (imode != GET_MODE (from))
4808 icode = scode, doing_unsigned = 0;
4809 }
4810
4811 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
4812 {
4813 if (imode != GET_MODE (from))
4814 from = convert_to_mode (imode, from, unsignedp);
4815
4816 if (fmode != GET_MODE (to))
4817 target = gen_reg_rtx (fmode);
4818
4819 emit_unop_insn (icode, target, from,
4820 doing_unsigned ? UNSIGNED_FLOAT : FLOAT);
4821
4822 if (target != to)
4823 convert_move (to, target, 0);
4824 return;
4825 }
4826 }
4827
4828 /* Unsigned integer, and no way to convert directly. Convert as signed,
4829 then unconditionally adjust the result. */
4830 if (unsignedp
4831 && can_do_signed
4832 && is_a <scalar_mode> (GET_MODE (to), &to_mode)
4833 && is_a <scalar_mode> (GET_MODE (from), &from_mode))
4834 {
4835 opt_scalar_mode fmode_iter;
4836 rtx_code_label *label = gen_label_rtx ();
4837 rtx temp;
4838 REAL_VALUE_TYPE offset;
4839
4840 /* Look for a usable floating mode FMODE wider than the source and at
4841 least as wide as the target. Using FMODE will avoid rounding woes
4842 with unsigned values greater than the signed maximum value. */
4843
4844 FOR_EACH_MODE_FROM (fmode_iter, to_mode)
4845 {
4846 scalar_mode fmode = fmode_iter.require ();
4847 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (fmode)
4848 && can_float_p (fmode, from_mode, 0) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
4849 break;
4850 }
4851
4852 if (!fmode_iter.exists (&fmode))
4853 {
4854 /* There is no such mode. Pretend the target is wide enough. */
4855 fmode = to_mode;
4856
4857 /* Avoid double-rounding when TO is narrower than FROM. */
4858 if ((significand_size (fmode) + 1)
4859 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode))
4860 {
4861 rtx temp1;
4862 rtx_code_label *neglabel = gen_label_rtx ();
4863
4864 /* Don't use TARGET if it isn't a register, is a hard register,
4865 or is the wrong mode. */
4866 if (!REG_P (target)
4867 || REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
4868 || GET_MODE (target) != fmode)
4869 target = gen_reg_rtx (fmode);
4870
4871 imode = from_mode;
4872 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
4873
4874 /* Test whether the sign bit is set. */
4875 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (from, const0_rtx, LT, NULL_RTX, imode,
4876 0, neglabel);
4877
4878 /* The sign bit is not set. Convert as signed. */
4879 expand_float (target, from, 0);
4880 emit_jump_insn (targetm.gen_jump (label));
4881 emit_barrier ();
4882
4883 /* The sign bit is set.
4884 Convert to a usable (positive signed) value by shifting right
4885 one bit, while remembering if a nonzero bit was shifted
4886 out; i.e., compute (from & 1) | (from >> 1). */
4887
4888 emit_label (neglabel);
4889 temp = expand_binop (imode, and_optab, from, const1_rtx,
4890 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
4891 temp1 = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, imode, from, 1, NULL_RTX, 1);
4892 temp = expand_binop (imode, ior_optab, temp, temp1, temp, 1,
4893 OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
4894 expand_float (target, temp, 0);
4895
4896 /* Multiply by 2 to undo the shift above. */
4897 temp = expand_binop (fmode, add_optab, target, target,
4898 target, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
4899 if (temp != target)
4900 emit_move_insn (target, temp);
4901
4902 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
4903 emit_label (label);
4904 goto done;
4905 }
4906 }
4907
4908 /* If we are about to do some arithmetic to correct for an
4909 unsigned operand, do it in a pseudo-register. */
4910
4911 if (to_mode != fmode
4912 || !REG_P (to) || REGNO (to) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
4913 target = gen_reg_rtx (fmode);
4914
4915 /* Convert as signed integer to floating. */
4916 expand_float (target, from, 0);
4917
4918 /* If FROM is negative (and therefore TO is negative),
4919 correct its value by 2**bitwidth. */
4920
4921 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
4922 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (from, const0_rtx, GE, NULL_RTX, from_mode,
4923 0, label);
4924
4925
4926 real_2expN (&offset, GET_MODE_PRECISION (from_mode), fmode);
4927 temp = expand_binop (fmode, add_optab, target,
4928 const_double_from_real_value (offset, fmode),
4929 target, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
4930 if (temp != target)
4931 emit_move_insn (target, temp);
4932
4933 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
4934 emit_label (label);
4935 goto done;
4936 }
4937
4938 /* No hardware instruction available; call a library routine. */
4939 {
4940 rtx libfunc;
4941 rtx_insn *insns;
4942 rtx value;
4943 convert_optab tab = unsignedp ? ufloat_optab : sfloat_optab;
4944
4945 if (is_narrower_int_mode (GET_MODE (from), SImode))
4946 from = convert_to_mode (SImode, from, unsignedp);
4947
4948 libfunc = convert_optab_libfunc (tab, GET_MODE (to), GET_MODE (from));
4949 gcc_assert (libfunc);
4950
4951 start_sequence ();
4952
4953 value = emit_library_call_value (libfunc, NULL_RTX, LCT_CONST,
4954 GET_MODE (to), from, GET_MODE (from));
4955 insns = get_insns ();
4956 end_sequence ();
4957
4958 emit_libcall_block (insns, target, value,
4959 gen_rtx_fmt_e (unsignedp ? UNSIGNED_FLOAT : FLOAT,
4960 GET_MODE (to), from));
4961 }
4962
4963 done:
4964
4965 /* Copy result to requested destination
4966 if we have been computing in a temp location. */
4967
4968 if (target != to)
4969 {
4970 if (GET_MODE (target) == GET_MODE (to))
4971 emit_move_insn (to, target);
4972 else
4973 convert_move (to, target, 0);
4974 }
4975 }
4976
4977 /* Generate code to convert FROM to fixed point and store in TO. FROM
4978 must be floating point. */
4979
4980 void
expand_fix(rtx to,rtx from,int unsignedp)4981 expand_fix (rtx to, rtx from, int unsignedp)
4982 {
4983 enum insn_code icode;
4984 rtx target = to;
4985 machine_mode fmode, imode;
4986 opt_scalar_mode fmode_iter;
4987 bool must_trunc = false;
4988
4989 /* We first try to find a pair of modes, one real and one integer, at
4990 least as wide as FROM and TO, respectively, in which we can open-code
4991 this conversion. If the integer mode is wider than the mode of TO,
4992 we can do the conversion either signed or unsigned. */
4993
4994 FOR_EACH_MODE_FROM (fmode, GET_MODE (from))
4995 FOR_EACH_MODE_FROM (imode, GET_MODE (to))
4996 {
4997 int doing_unsigned = unsignedp;
4998
4999 icode = can_fix_p (imode, fmode, unsignedp, &must_trunc);
5000 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing && imode != GET_MODE (to) && unsignedp)
5001 icode = can_fix_p (imode, fmode, 0, &must_trunc), doing_unsigned = 0;
5002
5003 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
5004 {
5005 rtx_insn *last = get_last_insn ();
5006 if (fmode != GET_MODE (from))
5007 from = convert_to_mode (fmode, from, 0);
5008
5009 if (must_trunc)
5010 {
5011 rtx temp = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (from));
5012 from = expand_unop (GET_MODE (from), ftrunc_optab, from,
5013 temp, 0);
5014 }
5015
5016 if (imode != GET_MODE (to))
5017 target = gen_reg_rtx (imode);
5018
5019 if (maybe_emit_unop_insn (icode, target, from,
5020 doing_unsigned ? UNSIGNED_FIX : FIX))
5021 {
5022 if (target != to)
5023 convert_move (to, target, unsignedp);
5024 return;
5025 }
5026 delete_insns_since (last);
5027 }
5028 }
5029
5030 /* For an unsigned conversion, there is one more way to do it.
5031 If we have a signed conversion, we generate code that compares
5032 the real value to the largest representable positive number. If if
5033 is smaller, the conversion is done normally. Otherwise, subtract
5034 one plus the highest signed number, convert, and add it back.
5035
5036 We only need to check all real modes, since we know we didn't find
5037 anything with a wider integer mode.
5038
5039 This code used to extend FP value into mode wider than the destination.
5040 This is needed for decimal float modes which cannot accurately
5041 represent one plus the highest signed number of the same size, but
5042 not for binary modes. Consider, for instance conversion from SFmode
5043 into DImode.
5044
5045 The hot path through the code is dealing with inputs smaller than 2^63
5046 and doing just the conversion, so there is no bits to lose.
5047
5048 In the other path we know the value is positive in the range 2^63..2^64-1
5049 inclusive. (as for other input overflow happens and result is undefined)
5050 So we know that the most important bit set in mantissa corresponds to
5051 2^63. The subtraction of 2^63 should not generate any rounding as it
5052 simply clears out that bit. The rest is trivial. */
5053
5054 scalar_int_mode to_mode;
5055 if (unsignedp
5056 && is_a <scalar_int_mode> (GET_MODE (to), &to_mode)
5057 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (to_mode))
5058 FOR_EACH_MODE_FROM (fmode_iter, as_a <scalar_mode> (GET_MODE (from)))
5059 {
5060 scalar_mode fmode = fmode_iter.require ();
5061 if (CODE_FOR_nothing != can_fix_p (to_mode, fmode,
5062 0, &must_trunc)
5063 && (!DECIMAL_FLOAT_MODE_P (fmode)
5064 || (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (fmode) > GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode))))
5065 {
5066 int bitsize;
5067 REAL_VALUE_TYPE offset;
5068 rtx limit;
5069 rtx_code_label *lab1, *lab2;
5070 rtx_insn *insn;
5071
5072 bitsize = GET_MODE_PRECISION (to_mode);
5073 real_2expN (&offset, bitsize - 1, fmode);
5074 limit = const_double_from_real_value (offset, fmode);
5075 lab1 = gen_label_rtx ();
5076 lab2 = gen_label_rtx ();
5077
5078 if (fmode != GET_MODE (from))
5079 from = convert_to_mode (fmode, from, 0);
5080
5081 /* See if we need to do the subtraction. */
5082 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
5083 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (from, limit, GE, NULL_RTX,
5084 GET_MODE (from), 0, lab1);
5085
5086 /* If not, do the signed "fix" and branch around fixup code. */
5087 expand_fix (to, from, 0);
5088 emit_jump_insn (targetm.gen_jump (lab2));
5089 emit_barrier ();
5090
5091 /* Otherwise, subtract 2**(N-1), convert to signed number,
5092 then add 2**(N-1). Do the addition using XOR since this
5093 will often generate better code. */
5094 emit_label (lab1);
5095 target = expand_binop (GET_MODE (from), sub_optab, from, limit,
5096 NULL_RTX, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
5097 expand_fix (to, target, 0);
5098 target = expand_binop (to_mode, xor_optab, to,
5099 gen_int_mode
5100 (HOST_WIDE_INT_1 << (bitsize - 1),
5101 to_mode),
5102 to, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
5103
5104 if (target != to)
5105 emit_move_insn (to, target);
5106
5107 emit_label (lab2);
5108
5109 if (optab_handler (mov_optab, to_mode) != CODE_FOR_nothing)
5110 {
5111 /* Make a place for a REG_NOTE and add it. */
5112 insn = emit_move_insn (to, to);
5113 set_dst_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL,
5114 gen_rtx_fmt_e (UNSIGNED_FIX, to_mode,
5115 copy_rtx (from)),
5116 to);
5117 }
5118
5119 return;
5120 }
5121 }
5122
5123 /* We can't do it with an insn, so use a library call. But first ensure
5124 that the mode of TO is at least as wide as SImode, since those are the
5125 only library calls we know about. */
5126
5127 if (is_narrower_int_mode (GET_MODE (to), SImode))
5128 {
5129 target = gen_reg_rtx (SImode);
5130
5131 expand_fix (target, from, unsignedp);
5132 }
5133 else
5134 {
5135 rtx_insn *insns;
5136 rtx value;
5137 rtx libfunc;
5138
5139 convert_optab tab = unsignedp ? ufix_optab : sfix_optab;
5140 libfunc = convert_optab_libfunc (tab, GET_MODE (to), GET_MODE (from));
5141 gcc_assert (libfunc);
5142
5143 start_sequence ();
5144
5145 value = emit_library_call_value (libfunc, NULL_RTX, LCT_CONST,
5146 GET_MODE (to), from, GET_MODE (from));
5147 insns = get_insns ();
5148 end_sequence ();
5149
5150 emit_libcall_block (insns, target, value,
5151 gen_rtx_fmt_e (unsignedp ? UNSIGNED_FIX : FIX,
5152 GET_MODE (to), from));
5153 }
5154
5155 if (target != to)
5156 {
5157 if (GET_MODE (to) == GET_MODE (target))
5158 emit_move_insn (to, target);
5159 else
5160 convert_move (to, target, 0);
5161 }
5162 }
5163
5164
5165 /* Promote integer arguments for a libcall if necessary.
5166 emit_library_call_value cannot do the promotion because it does not
5167 know if it should do a signed or unsigned promotion. This is because
5168 there are no tree types defined for libcalls. */
5169
5170 static rtx
prepare_libcall_arg(rtx arg,int uintp)5171 prepare_libcall_arg (rtx arg, int uintp)
5172 {
5173 scalar_int_mode mode;
5174 machine_mode arg_mode;
5175 if (is_a <scalar_int_mode> (GET_MODE (arg), &mode))
5176 {
5177 /* If we need to promote the integer function argument we need to do
5178 it here instead of inside emit_library_call_value because in
5179 emit_library_call_value we don't know if we should do a signed or
5180 unsigned promotion. */
5181
5182 int unsigned_p = 0;
5183 arg_mode = promote_function_mode (NULL_TREE, mode,
5184 &unsigned_p, NULL_TREE, 0);
5185 if (arg_mode != mode)
5186 return convert_to_mode (arg_mode, arg, uintp);
5187 }
5188 return arg;
5189 }
5190
5191 /* Generate code to convert FROM or TO a fixed-point.
5192 If UINTP is true, either TO or FROM is an unsigned integer.
5193 If SATP is true, we need to saturate the result. */
5194
5195 void
expand_fixed_convert(rtx to,rtx from,int uintp,int satp)5196 expand_fixed_convert (rtx to, rtx from, int uintp, int satp)
5197 {
5198 machine_mode to_mode = GET_MODE (to);
5199 machine_mode from_mode = GET_MODE (from);
5200 convert_optab tab;
5201 enum rtx_code this_code;
5202 enum insn_code code;
5203 rtx_insn *insns;
5204 rtx value;
5205 rtx libfunc;
5206
5207 if (to_mode == from_mode)
5208 {
5209 emit_move_insn (to, from);
5210 return;
5211 }
5212
5213 if (uintp)
5214 {
5215 tab = satp ? satfractuns_optab : fractuns_optab;
5216 this_code = satp ? UNSIGNED_SAT_FRACT : UNSIGNED_FRACT_CONVERT;
5217 }
5218 else
5219 {
5220 tab = satp ? satfract_optab : fract_optab;
5221 this_code = satp ? SAT_FRACT : FRACT_CONVERT;
5222 }
5223 code = convert_optab_handler (tab, to_mode, from_mode);
5224 if (code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
5225 {
5226 emit_unop_insn (code, to, from, this_code);
5227 return;
5228 }
5229
5230 libfunc = convert_optab_libfunc (tab, to_mode, from_mode);
5231 gcc_assert (libfunc);
5232
5233 from = prepare_libcall_arg (from, uintp);
5234 from_mode = GET_MODE (from);
5235
5236 start_sequence ();
5237 value = emit_library_call_value (libfunc, NULL_RTX, LCT_CONST, to_mode,
5238 from, from_mode);
5239 insns = get_insns ();
5240 end_sequence ();
5241
5242 emit_libcall_block (insns, to, value,
5243 gen_rtx_fmt_e (optab_to_code (tab), to_mode, from));
5244 }
5245
5246 /* Generate code to convert FROM to fixed point and store in TO. FROM
5247 must be floating point, TO must be signed. Use the conversion optab
5248 TAB to do the conversion. */
5249
5250 bool
expand_sfix_optab(rtx to,rtx from,convert_optab tab)5251 expand_sfix_optab (rtx to, rtx from, convert_optab tab)
5252 {
5253 enum insn_code icode;
5254 rtx target = to;
5255 machine_mode fmode, imode;
5256
5257 /* We first try to find a pair of modes, one real and one integer, at
5258 least as wide as FROM and TO, respectively, in which we can open-code
5259 this conversion. If the integer mode is wider than the mode of TO,
5260 we can do the conversion either signed or unsigned. */
5261
5262 FOR_EACH_MODE_FROM (fmode, GET_MODE (from))
5263 FOR_EACH_MODE_FROM (imode, GET_MODE (to))
5264 {
5265 icode = convert_optab_handler (tab, imode, fmode);
5266 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
5267 {
5268 rtx_insn *last = get_last_insn ();
5269 if (fmode != GET_MODE (from))
5270 from = convert_to_mode (fmode, from, 0);
5271
5272 if (imode != GET_MODE (to))
5273 target = gen_reg_rtx (imode);
5274
5275 if (!maybe_emit_unop_insn (icode, target, from, UNKNOWN))
5276 {
5277 delete_insns_since (last);
5278 continue;
5279 }
5280 if (target != to)
5281 convert_move (to, target, 0);
5282 return true;
5283 }
5284 }
5285
5286 return false;
5287 }
5288
5289 /* Report whether we have an instruction to perform the operation
5290 specified by CODE on operands of mode MODE. */
5291 int
have_insn_for(enum rtx_code code,machine_mode mode)5292 have_insn_for (enum rtx_code code, machine_mode mode)
5293 {
5294 return (code_to_optab (code)
5295 && (optab_handler (code_to_optab (code), mode)
5296 != CODE_FOR_nothing));
5297 }
5298
5299 /* Print information about the current contents of the optabs on
5300 STDERR. */
5301
5302 DEBUG_FUNCTION void
debug_optab_libfuncs(void)5303 debug_optab_libfuncs (void)
5304 {
5305 int i, j, k;
5306
5307 /* Dump the arithmetic optabs. */
5308 for (i = FIRST_NORM_OPTAB; i <= LAST_NORMLIB_OPTAB; ++i)
5309 for (j = 0; j < NUM_MACHINE_MODES; ++j)
5310 {
5311 rtx l = optab_libfunc ((optab) i, (machine_mode) j);
5312 if (l)
5313 {
5314 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (l) == SYMBOL_REF);
5315 fprintf (stderr, "%s\t%s:\t%s\n",
5316 GET_RTX_NAME (optab_to_code ((optab) i)),
5317 GET_MODE_NAME (j),
5318 XSTR (l, 0));
5319 }
5320 }
5321
5322 /* Dump the conversion optabs. */
5323 for (i = FIRST_CONV_OPTAB; i <= LAST_CONVLIB_OPTAB; ++i)
5324 for (j = 0; j < NUM_MACHINE_MODES; ++j)
5325 for (k = 0; k < NUM_MACHINE_MODES; ++k)
5326 {
5327 rtx l = convert_optab_libfunc ((optab) i, (machine_mode) j,
5328 (machine_mode) k);
5329 if (l)
5330 {
5331 gcc_assert (GET_CODE (l) == SYMBOL_REF);
5332 fprintf (stderr, "%s\t%s\t%s:\t%s\n",
5333 GET_RTX_NAME (optab_to_code ((optab) i)),
5334 GET_MODE_NAME (j),
5335 GET_MODE_NAME (k),
5336 XSTR (l, 0));
5337 }
5338 }
5339 }
5340
5341 /* Generate insns to trap with code TCODE if OP1 and OP2 satisfy condition
5342 CODE. Return 0 on failure. */
5343
5344 rtx_insn *
gen_cond_trap(enum rtx_code code,rtx op1,rtx op2,rtx tcode)5345 gen_cond_trap (enum rtx_code code, rtx op1, rtx op2, rtx tcode)
5346 {
5347 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (op1);
5348 enum insn_code icode;
5349 rtx_insn *insn;
5350 rtx trap_rtx;
5351
5352 if (mode == VOIDmode)
5353 return 0;
5354
5355 icode = optab_handler (ctrap_optab, mode);
5356 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing)
5357 return 0;
5358
5359 /* Some targets only accept a zero trap code. */
5360 if (!insn_operand_matches (icode, 3, tcode))
5361 return 0;
5362
5363 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
5364 start_sequence ();
5365 prepare_cmp_insn (op1, op2, code, NULL_RTX, false, OPTAB_DIRECT,
5366 &trap_rtx, &mode);
5367 if (!trap_rtx)
5368 insn = NULL;
5369 else
5370 insn = GEN_FCN (icode) (trap_rtx, XEXP (trap_rtx, 0), XEXP (trap_rtx, 1),
5371 tcode);
5372
5373 /* If that failed, then give up. */
5374 if (insn == 0)
5375 {
5376 end_sequence ();
5377 return 0;
5378 }
5379
5380 emit_insn (insn);
5381 insn = get_insns ();
5382 end_sequence ();
5383 return insn;
5384 }
5385
5386 /* Return rtx code for TCODE. Use UNSIGNEDP to select signed
5387 or unsigned operation code. */
5388
5389 enum rtx_code
get_rtx_code(enum tree_code tcode,bool unsignedp)5390 get_rtx_code (enum tree_code tcode, bool unsignedp)
5391 {
5392 enum rtx_code code;
5393 switch (tcode)
5394 {
5395 case EQ_EXPR:
5396 code = EQ;
5397 break;
5398 case NE_EXPR:
5399 code = NE;
5400 break;
5401 case LT_EXPR:
5402 code = unsignedp ? LTU : LT;
5403 break;
5404 case LE_EXPR:
5405 code = unsignedp ? LEU : LE;
5406 break;
5407 case GT_EXPR:
5408 code = unsignedp ? GTU : GT;
5409 break;
5410 case GE_EXPR:
5411 code = unsignedp ? GEU : GE;
5412 break;
5413
5414 case UNORDERED_EXPR:
5415 code = UNORDERED;
5416 break;
5417 case ORDERED_EXPR:
5418 code = ORDERED;
5419 break;
5420 case UNLT_EXPR:
5421 code = UNLT;
5422 break;
5423 case UNLE_EXPR:
5424 code = UNLE;
5425 break;
5426 case UNGT_EXPR:
5427 code = UNGT;
5428 break;
5429 case UNGE_EXPR:
5430 code = UNGE;
5431 break;
5432 case UNEQ_EXPR:
5433 code = UNEQ;
5434 break;
5435 case LTGT_EXPR:
5436 code = LTGT;
5437 break;
5438
5439 case BIT_AND_EXPR:
5440 code = AND;
5441 break;
5442
5443 case BIT_IOR_EXPR:
5444 code = IOR;
5445 break;
5446
5447 default:
5448 gcc_unreachable ();
5449 }
5450 return code;
5451 }
5452
5453 /* Return a comparison rtx of mode CMP_MODE for COND. Use UNSIGNEDP to
5454 select signed or unsigned operators. OPNO holds the index of the
5455 first comparison operand for insn ICODE. Do not generate the
5456 compare instruction itself. */
5457
5458 static rtx
vector_compare_rtx(machine_mode cmp_mode,enum tree_code tcode,tree t_op0,tree t_op1,bool unsignedp,enum insn_code icode,unsigned int opno)5459 vector_compare_rtx (machine_mode cmp_mode, enum tree_code tcode,
5460 tree t_op0, tree t_op1, bool unsignedp,
5461 enum insn_code icode, unsigned int opno)
5462 {
5463 class expand_operand ops[2];
5464 rtx rtx_op0, rtx_op1;
5465 machine_mode m0, m1;
5466 enum rtx_code rcode = get_rtx_code (tcode, unsignedp);
5467
5468 gcc_assert (TREE_CODE_CLASS (tcode) == tcc_comparison);
5469
5470 /* Expand operands. For vector types with scalar modes, e.g. where int64x1_t
5471 has mode DImode, this can produce a constant RTX of mode VOIDmode; in such
5472 cases, use the original mode. */
5473 rtx_op0 = expand_expr (t_op0, NULL_RTX, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (t_op0)),
5474 EXPAND_STACK_PARM);
5475 m0 = GET_MODE (rtx_op0);
5476 if (m0 == VOIDmode)
5477 m0 = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (t_op0));
5478
5479 rtx_op1 = expand_expr (t_op1, NULL_RTX, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (t_op1)),
5480 EXPAND_STACK_PARM);
5481 m1 = GET_MODE (rtx_op1);
5482 if (m1 == VOIDmode)
5483 m1 = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (t_op1));
5484
5485 create_input_operand (&ops[0], rtx_op0, m0);
5486 create_input_operand (&ops[1], rtx_op1, m1);
5487 if (!maybe_legitimize_operands (icode, opno, 2, ops))
5488 gcc_unreachable ();
5489 return gen_rtx_fmt_ee (rcode, cmp_mode, ops[0].value, ops[1].value);
5490 }
5491
5492 /* Check if vec_perm mask SEL is a constant equivalent to a shift of
5493 the first vec_perm operand, assuming the second operand (for left shift
5494 first operand) is a constant vector of zeros. Return the shift distance
5495 in bits if so, or NULL_RTX if the vec_perm is not a shift. MODE is the
5496 mode of the value being shifted. SHIFT_OPTAB is vec_shr_optab for right
5497 shift or vec_shl_optab for left shift. */
5498 static rtx
shift_amt_for_vec_perm_mask(machine_mode mode,const vec_perm_indices & sel,optab shift_optab)5499 shift_amt_for_vec_perm_mask (machine_mode mode, const vec_perm_indices &sel,
5500 optab shift_optab)
5501 {
5502 unsigned int bitsize = GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (mode);
5503 poly_int64 first = sel[0];
5504 if (maybe_ge (sel[0], GET_MODE_NUNITS (mode)))
5505 return NULL_RTX;
5506
5507 if (shift_optab == vec_shl_optab)
5508 {
5509 unsigned int nelt;
5510 if (!GET_MODE_NUNITS (mode).is_constant (&nelt))
5511 return NULL_RTX;
5512 unsigned firstidx = 0;
5513 for (unsigned int i = 0; i < nelt; i++)
5514 {
5515 if (known_eq (sel[i], nelt))
5516 {
5517 if (i == 0 || firstidx)
5518 return NULL_RTX;
5519 firstidx = i;
5520 }
5521 else if (firstidx
5522 ? maybe_ne (sel[i], nelt + i - firstidx)
5523 : maybe_ge (sel[i], nelt))
5524 return NULL_RTX;
5525 }
5526
5527 if (firstidx == 0)
5528 return NULL_RTX;
5529 first = firstidx;
5530 }
5531 else if (!sel.series_p (0, 1, first, 1))
5532 {
5533 unsigned int nelt;
5534 if (!GET_MODE_NUNITS (mode).is_constant (&nelt))
5535 return NULL_RTX;
5536 for (unsigned int i = 1; i < nelt; i++)
5537 {
5538 poly_int64 expected = i + first;
5539 /* Indices into the second vector are all equivalent. */
5540 if (maybe_lt (sel[i], nelt)
5541 ? maybe_ne (sel[i], expected)
5542 : maybe_lt (expected, nelt))
5543 return NULL_RTX;
5544 }
5545 }
5546
5547 return gen_int_shift_amount (mode, first * bitsize);
5548 }
5549
5550 /* A subroutine of expand_vec_perm_var for expanding one vec_perm insn. */
5551
5552 static rtx
expand_vec_perm_1(enum insn_code icode,rtx target,rtx v0,rtx v1,rtx sel)5553 expand_vec_perm_1 (enum insn_code icode, rtx target,
5554 rtx v0, rtx v1, rtx sel)
5555 {
5556 machine_mode tmode = GET_MODE (target);
5557 machine_mode smode = GET_MODE (sel);
5558 class expand_operand ops[4];
5559
5560 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_CLASS (smode) == MODE_VECTOR_INT
5561 || related_int_vector_mode (tmode).require () == smode);
5562 create_output_operand (&ops[0], target, tmode);
5563 create_input_operand (&ops[3], sel, smode);
5564
5565 /* Make an effort to preserve v0 == v1. The target expander is able to
5566 rely on this to determine if we're permuting a single input operand. */
5567 if (rtx_equal_p (v0, v1))
5568 {
5569 if (!insn_operand_matches (icode, 1, v0))
5570 v0 = force_reg (tmode, v0);
5571 gcc_checking_assert (insn_operand_matches (icode, 1, v0));
5572 gcc_checking_assert (insn_operand_matches (icode, 2, v0));
5573
5574 create_fixed_operand (&ops[1], v0);
5575 create_fixed_operand (&ops[2], v0);
5576 }
5577 else
5578 {
5579 create_input_operand (&ops[1], v0, tmode);
5580 create_input_operand (&ops[2], v1, tmode);
5581 }
5582
5583 if (maybe_expand_insn (icode, 4, ops))
5584 return ops[0].value;
5585 return NULL_RTX;
5586 }
5587
5588 /* Implement a permutation of vectors v0 and v1 using the permutation
5589 vector in SEL and return the result. Use TARGET to hold the result
5590 if nonnull and convenient.
5591
5592 MODE is the mode of the vectors being permuted (V0 and V1). SEL_MODE
5593 is the TYPE_MODE associated with SEL, or BLKmode if SEL isn't known
5594 to have a particular mode. */
5595
5596 rtx
expand_vec_perm_const(machine_mode mode,rtx v0,rtx v1,const vec_perm_builder & sel,machine_mode sel_mode,rtx target)5597 expand_vec_perm_const (machine_mode mode, rtx v0, rtx v1,
5598 const vec_perm_builder &sel, machine_mode sel_mode,
5599 rtx target)
5600 {
5601 if (!target || !register_operand (target, mode))
5602 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
5603
5604 /* Set QIMODE to a different vector mode with byte elements.
5605 If no such mode, or if MODE already has byte elements, use VOIDmode. */
5606 machine_mode qimode;
5607 if (!qimode_for_vec_perm (mode).exists (&qimode))
5608 qimode = VOIDmode;
5609
5610 rtx_insn *last = get_last_insn ();
5611
5612 bool single_arg_p = rtx_equal_p (v0, v1);
5613 /* Always specify two input vectors here and leave the target to handle
5614 cases in which the inputs are equal. Not all backends can cope with
5615 the single-input representation when testing for a double-input
5616 target instruction. */
5617 vec_perm_indices indices (sel, 2, GET_MODE_NUNITS (mode));
5618
5619 /* See if this can be handled with a vec_shr or vec_shl. We only do this
5620 if the second (for vec_shr) or first (for vec_shl) vector is all
5621 zeroes. */
5622 insn_code shift_code = CODE_FOR_nothing;
5623 insn_code shift_code_qi = CODE_FOR_nothing;
5624 optab shift_optab = unknown_optab;
5625 rtx v2 = v0;
5626 if (v1 == CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (v1)))
5627 shift_optab = vec_shr_optab;
5628 else if (v0 == CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (v0)))
5629 {
5630 shift_optab = vec_shl_optab;
5631 v2 = v1;
5632 }
5633 if (shift_optab != unknown_optab)
5634 {
5635 shift_code = optab_handler (shift_optab, mode);
5636 shift_code_qi = ((qimode != VOIDmode && qimode != mode)
5637 ? optab_handler (shift_optab, qimode)
5638 : CODE_FOR_nothing);
5639 }
5640 if (shift_code != CODE_FOR_nothing || shift_code_qi != CODE_FOR_nothing)
5641 {
5642 rtx shift_amt = shift_amt_for_vec_perm_mask (mode, indices, shift_optab);
5643 if (shift_amt)
5644 {
5645 class expand_operand ops[3];
5646 if (shift_amt == const0_rtx)
5647 return v2;
5648 if (shift_code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
5649 {
5650 create_output_operand (&ops[0], target, mode);
5651 create_input_operand (&ops[1], v2, mode);
5652 create_convert_operand_from_type (&ops[2], shift_amt, sizetype);
5653 if (maybe_expand_insn (shift_code, 3, ops))
5654 return ops[0].value;
5655 }
5656 if (shift_code_qi != CODE_FOR_nothing)
5657 {
5658 rtx tmp = gen_reg_rtx (qimode);
5659 create_output_operand (&ops[0], tmp, qimode);
5660 create_input_operand (&ops[1], gen_lowpart (qimode, v2), qimode);
5661 create_convert_operand_from_type (&ops[2], shift_amt, sizetype);
5662 if (maybe_expand_insn (shift_code_qi, 3, ops))
5663 return gen_lowpart (mode, ops[0].value);
5664 }
5665 }
5666 }
5667
5668 if (targetm.vectorize.vec_perm_const != NULL)
5669 {
5670 v0 = force_reg (mode, v0);
5671 if (single_arg_p)
5672 v1 = v0;
5673 else
5674 v1 = force_reg (mode, v1);
5675
5676 if (targetm.vectorize.vec_perm_const (mode, target, v0, v1, indices))
5677 return target;
5678 }
5679
5680 /* Fall back to a constant byte-based permutation. */
5681 vec_perm_indices qimode_indices;
5682 rtx target_qi = NULL_RTX, v0_qi = NULL_RTX, v1_qi = NULL_RTX;
5683 if (qimode != VOIDmode)
5684 {
5685 qimode_indices.new_expanded_vector (indices, GET_MODE_UNIT_SIZE (mode));
5686 target_qi = gen_reg_rtx (qimode);
5687 v0_qi = gen_lowpart (qimode, v0);
5688 v1_qi = gen_lowpart (qimode, v1);
5689 if (targetm.vectorize.vec_perm_const != NULL
5690 && targetm.vectorize.vec_perm_const (qimode, target_qi, v0_qi,
5691 v1_qi, qimode_indices))
5692 return gen_lowpart (mode, target_qi);
5693 }
5694
5695 /* Otherwise expand as a fully variable permuation. */
5696
5697 /* The optabs are only defined for selectors with the same width
5698 as the values being permuted. */
5699 machine_mode required_sel_mode;
5700 if (!related_int_vector_mode (mode).exists (&required_sel_mode))
5701 {
5702 delete_insns_since (last);
5703 return NULL_RTX;
5704 }
5705
5706 /* We know that it is semantically valid to treat SEL as having SEL_MODE.
5707 If that isn't the mode we want then we need to prove that using
5708 REQUIRED_SEL_MODE is OK. */
5709 if (sel_mode != required_sel_mode)
5710 {
5711 if (!selector_fits_mode_p (required_sel_mode, indices))
5712 {
5713 delete_insns_since (last);
5714 return NULL_RTX;
5715 }
5716 sel_mode = required_sel_mode;
5717 }
5718
5719 insn_code icode = direct_optab_handler (vec_perm_optab, mode);
5720 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
5721 {
5722 rtx sel_rtx = vec_perm_indices_to_rtx (sel_mode, indices);
5723 rtx tmp = expand_vec_perm_1 (icode, target, v0, v1, sel_rtx);
5724 if (tmp)
5725 return tmp;
5726 }
5727
5728 if (qimode != VOIDmode
5729 && selector_fits_mode_p (qimode, qimode_indices))
5730 {
5731 icode = direct_optab_handler (vec_perm_optab, qimode);
5732 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
5733 {
5734 rtx sel_qi = vec_perm_indices_to_rtx (qimode, qimode_indices);
5735 rtx tmp = expand_vec_perm_1 (icode, target_qi, v0_qi, v1_qi, sel_qi);
5736 if (tmp)
5737 return gen_lowpart (mode, tmp);
5738 }
5739 }
5740
5741 delete_insns_since (last);
5742 return NULL_RTX;
5743 }
5744
5745 /* Implement a permutation of vectors v0 and v1 using the permutation
5746 vector in SEL and return the result. Use TARGET to hold the result
5747 if nonnull and convenient.
5748
5749 MODE is the mode of the vectors being permuted (V0 and V1).
5750 SEL must have the integer equivalent of MODE and is known to be
5751 unsuitable for permutes with a constant permutation vector. */
5752
5753 rtx
expand_vec_perm_var(machine_mode mode,rtx v0,rtx v1,rtx sel,rtx target)5754 expand_vec_perm_var (machine_mode mode, rtx v0, rtx v1, rtx sel, rtx target)
5755 {
5756 enum insn_code icode;
5757 unsigned int i, u;
5758 rtx tmp, sel_qi;
5759
5760 u = GET_MODE_UNIT_SIZE (mode);
5761
5762 if (!target || GET_MODE (target) != mode)
5763 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
5764
5765 icode = direct_optab_handler (vec_perm_optab, mode);
5766 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
5767 {
5768 tmp = expand_vec_perm_1 (icode, target, v0, v1, sel);
5769 if (tmp)
5770 return tmp;
5771 }
5772
5773 /* As a special case to aid several targets, lower the element-based
5774 permutation to a byte-based permutation and try again. */
5775 machine_mode qimode;
5776 if (!qimode_for_vec_perm (mode).exists (&qimode)
5777 || maybe_gt (GET_MODE_NUNITS (qimode), GET_MODE_MASK (QImode) + 1))
5778 return NULL_RTX;
5779 icode = direct_optab_handler (vec_perm_optab, qimode);
5780 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing)
5781 return NULL_RTX;
5782
5783 /* Multiply each element by its byte size. */
5784 machine_mode selmode = GET_MODE (sel);
5785 if (u == 2)
5786 sel = expand_simple_binop (selmode, PLUS, sel, sel,
5787 NULL, 0, OPTAB_DIRECT);
5788 else
5789 sel = expand_simple_binop (selmode, ASHIFT, sel,
5790 gen_int_shift_amount (selmode, exact_log2 (u)),
5791 NULL, 0, OPTAB_DIRECT);
5792 gcc_assert (sel != NULL);
5793
5794 /* Broadcast the low byte each element into each of its bytes.
5795 The encoding has U interleaved stepped patterns, one for each
5796 byte of an element. */
5797 vec_perm_builder const_sel (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), u, 3);
5798 unsigned int low_byte_in_u = BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN ? u - 1 : 0;
5799 for (i = 0; i < 3; ++i)
5800 for (unsigned int j = 0; j < u; ++j)
5801 const_sel.quick_push (i * u + low_byte_in_u);
5802 sel = gen_lowpart (qimode, sel);
5803 sel = expand_vec_perm_const (qimode, sel, sel, const_sel, qimode, NULL);
5804 gcc_assert (sel != NULL);
5805
5806 /* Add the byte offset to each byte element. */
5807 /* Note that the definition of the indicies here is memory ordering,
5808 so there should be no difference between big and little endian. */
5809 rtx_vector_builder byte_indices (qimode, u, 1);
5810 for (i = 0; i < u; ++i)
5811 byte_indices.quick_push (GEN_INT (i));
5812 tmp = byte_indices.build ();
5813 sel_qi = expand_simple_binop (qimode, PLUS, sel, tmp,
5814 sel, 0, OPTAB_DIRECT);
5815 gcc_assert (sel_qi != NULL);
5816
5817 tmp = mode != qimode ? gen_reg_rtx (qimode) : target;
5818 tmp = expand_vec_perm_1 (icode, tmp, gen_lowpart (qimode, v0),
5819 gen_lowpart (qimode, v1), sel_qi);
5820 if (tmp)
5821 tmp = gen_lowpart (mode, tmp);
5822 return tmp;
5823 }
5824
5825 /* Generate insns for a VEC_COND_EXPR with mask, given its TYPE and its
5826 three operands. */
5827
5828 rtx
expand_vec_cond_mask_expr(tree vec_cond_type,tree op0,tree op1,tree op2,rtx target)5829 expand_vec_cond_mask_expr (tree vec_cond_type, tree op0, tree op1, tree op2,
5830 rtx target)
5831 {
5832 class expand_operand ops[4];
5833 machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (vec_cond_type);
5834 machine_mode mask_mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (op0));
5835 enum insn_code icode = get_vcond_mask_icode (mode, mask_mode);
5836 rtx mask, rtx_op1, rtx_op2;
5837
5838 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing)
5839 return 0;
5840
5841 mask = expand_normal (op0);
5842 rtx_op1 = expand_normal (op1);
5843 rtx_op2 = expand_normal (op2);
5844
5845 mask = force_reg (mask_mode, mask);
5846 rtx_op1 = force_reg (GET_MODE (rtx_op1), rtx_op1);
5847
5848 create_output_operand (&ops[0], target, mode);
5849 create_input_operand (&ops[1], rtx_op1, mode);
5850 create_input_operand (&ops[2], rtx_op2, mode);
5851 create_input_operand (&ops[3], mask, mask_mode);
5852 expand_insn (icode, 4, ops);
5853
5854 return ops[0].value;
5855 }
5856
5857 /* Generate insns for a VEC_COND_EXPR, given its TYPE and its
5858 three operands. */
5859
5860 rtx
expand_vec_cond_expr(tree vec_cond_type,tree op0,tree op1,tree op2,rtx target)5861 expand_vec_cond_expr (tree vec_cond_type, tree op0, tree op1, tree op2,
5862 rtx target)
5863 {
5864 class expand_operand ops[6];
5865 enum insn_code icode;
5866 rtx comparison, rtx_op1, rtx_op2;
5867 machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (vec_cond_type);
5868 machine_mode cmp_op_mode;
5869 bool unsignedp;
5870 tree op0a, op0b;
5871 enum tree_code tcode;
5872
5873 if (COMPARISON_CLASS_P (op0))
5874 {
5875 op0a = TREE_OPERAND (op0, 0);
5876 op0b = TREE_OPERAND (op0, 1);
5877 tcode = TREE_CODE (op0);
5878 }
5879 else
5880 {
5881 gcc_assert (VECTOR_BOOLEAN_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (op0)));
5882 if (get_vcond_mask_icode (mode, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (op0)))
5883 != CODE_FOR_nothing)
5884 return expand_vec_cond_mask_expr (vec_cond_type, op0, op1,
5885 op2, target);
5886 /* Fake op0 < 0. */
5887 else
5888 {
5889 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_CLASS (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (op0)))
5890 == MODE_VECTOR_INT);
5891 op0a = op0;
5892 op0b = build_zero_cst (TREE_TYPE (op0));
5893 tcode = LT_EXPR;
5894 }
5895 }
5896 cmp_op_mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (op0a));
5897 unsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (op0a));
5898
5899
5900 gcc_assert (known_eq (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), GET_MODE_SIZE (cmp_op_mode))
5901 && known_eq (GET_MODE_NUNITS (mode),
5902 GET_MODE_NUNITS (cmp_op_mode)));
5903
5904 icode = get_vcond_icode (mode, cmp_op_mode, unsignedp);
5905 /* Some targets do not have vcondeq and only vcond with NE/EQ
5906 but not vcondu, so make sure to also try vcond here as
5907 vcond_icode_p would canonicalize the optab query to. */
5908 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing
5909 && (tcode == NE_EXPR || tcode == EQ_EXPR)
5910 && ((icode = get_vcond_icode (mode, cmp_op_mode, !unsignedp))
5911 != CODE_FOR_nothing))
5912 unsignedp = !unsignedp;
5913 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing)
5914 {
5915 if (tcode == LT_EXPR
5916 && op0a == op0
5917 && TREE_CODE (op0) == VECTOR_CST)
5918 {
5919 /* A VEC_COND_EXPR condition could be folded from EQ_EXPR/NE_EXPR
5920 into a constant when only get_vcond_eq_icode is supported.
5921 Verify < 0 and != 0 behave the same and change it to NE_EXPR. */
5922 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nelts;
5923 if (!VECTOR_CST_NELTS (op0).is_constant (&nelts))
5924 {
5925 if (VECTOR_CST_STEPPED_P (op0))
5926 return 0;
5927 nelts = vector_cst_encoded_nelts (op0);
5928 }
5929 for (unsigned int i = 0; i < nelts; ++i)
5930 if (tree_int_cst_sgn (vector_cst_elt (op0, i)) == 1)
5931 return 0;
5932 tcode = NE_EXPR;
5933 }
5934 if (tcode == EQ_EXPR || tcode == NE_EXPR)
5935 icode = get_vcond_eq_icode (mode, cmp_op_mode);
5936 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing)
5937 return 0;
5938 }
5939
5940 comparison = vector_compare_rtx (VOIDmode, tcode, op0a, op0b, unsignedp,
5941 icode, 4);
5942 rtx_op1 = expand_normal (op1);
5943 rtx_op2 = expand_normal (op2);
5944
5945 create_output_operand (&ops[0], target, mode);
5946 create_input_operand (&ops[1], rtx_op1, mode);
5947 create_input_operand (&ops[2], rtx_op2, mode);
5948 create_fixed_operand (&ops[3], comparison);
5949 create_fixed_operand (&ops[4], XEXP (comparison, 0));
5950 create_fixed_operand (&ops[5], XEXP (comparison, 1));
5951 expand_insn (icode, 6, ops);
5952 return ops[0].value;
5953 }
5954
5955 /* Generate VEC_SERIES_EXPR <OP0, OP1>, returning a value of mode VMODE.
5956 Use TARGET for the result if nonnull and convenient. */
5957
5958 rtx
expand_vec_series_expr(machine_mode vmode,rtx op0,rtx op1,rtx target)5959 expand_vec_series_expr (machine_mode vmode, rtx op0, rtx op1, rtx target)
5960 {
5961 class expand_operand ops[3];
5962 enum insn_code icode;
5963 machine_mode emode = GET_MODE_INNER (vmode);
5964
5965 icode = direct_optab_handler (vec_series_optab, vmode);
5966 gcc_assert (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing);
5967
5968 create_output_operand (&ops[0], target, vmode);
5969 create_input_operand (&ops[1], op0, emode);
5970 create_input_operand (&ops[2], op1, emode);
5971
5972 expand_insn (icode, 3, ops);
5973 return ops[0].value;
5974 }
5975
5976 /* Generate insns for a vector comparison into a mask. */
5977
5978 rtx
expand_vec_cmp_expr(tree type,tree exp,rtx target)5979 expand_vec_cmp_expr (tree type, tree exp, rtx target)
5980 {
5981 class expand_operand ops[4];
5982 enum insn_code icode;
5983 rtx comparison;
5984 machine_mode mask_mode = TYPE_MODE (type);
5985 machine_mode vmode;
5986 bool unsignedp;
5987 tree op0a, op0b;
5988 enum tree_code tcode;
5989
5990 op0a = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
5991 op0b = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
5992 tcode = TREE_CODE (exp);
5993
5994 unsignedp = TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (op0a));
5995 vmode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (op0a));
5996
5997 icode = get_vec_cmp_icode (vmode, mask_mode, unsignedp);
5998 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing)
5999 {
6000 if (tcode == EQ_EXPR || tcode == NE_EXPR)
6001 icode = get_vec_cmp_eq_icode (vmode, mask_mode);
6002 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing)
6003 return 0;
6004 }
6005
6006 comparison = vector_compare_rtx (mask_mode, tcode, op0a, op0b,
6007 unsignedp, icode, 2);
6008 create_output_operand (&ops[0], target, mask_mode);
6009 create_fixed_operand (&ops[1], comparison);
6010 create_fixed_operand (&ops[2], XEXP (comparison, 0));
6011 create_fixed_operand (&ops[3], XEXP (comparison, 1));
6012 expand_insn (icode, 4, ops);
6013 return ops[0].value;
6014 }
6015
6016 /* Expand a highpart multiply. */
6017
6018 rtx
expand_mult_highpart(machine_mode mode,rtx op0,rtx op1,rtx target,bool uns_p)6019 expand_mult_highpart (machine_mode mode, rtx op0, rtx op1,
6020 rtx target, bool uns_p)
6021 {
6022 class expand_operand eops[3];
6023 enum insn_code icode;
6024 int method, i;
6025 machine_mode wmode;
6026 rtx m1, m2;
6027 optab tab1, tab2;
6028
6029 method = can_mult_highpart_p (mode, uns_p);
6030 switch (method)
6031 {
6032 case 0:
6033 return NULL_RTX;
6034 case 1:
6035 tab1 = uns_p ? umul_highpart_optab : smul_highpart_optab;
6036 return expand_binop (mode, tab1, op0, op1, target, uns_p,
6037 OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
6038 case 2:
6039 tab1 = uns_p ? vec_widen_umult_even_optab : vec_widen_smult_even_optab;
6040 tab2 = uns_p ? vec_widen_umult_odd_optab : vec_widen_smult_odd_optab;
6041 break;
6042 case 3:
6043 tab1 = uns_p ? vec_widen_umult_lo_optab : vec_widen_smult_lo_optab;
6044 tab2 = uns_p ? vec_widen_umult_hi_optab : vec_widen_smult_hi_optab;
6045 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
6046 std::swap (tab1, tab2);
6047 break;
6048 default:
6049 gcc_unreachable ();
6050 }
6051
6052 icode = optab_handler (tab1, mode);
6053 wmode = insn_data[icode].operand[0].mode;
6054 gcc_checking_assert (known_eq (2 * GET_MODE_NUNITS (wmode),
6055 GET_MODE_NUNITS (mode)));
6056 gcc_checking_assert (known_eq (GET_MODE_SIZE (wmode), GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)));
6057
6058 create_output_operand (&eops[0], gen_reg_rtx (wmode), wmode);
6059 create_input_operand (&eops[1], op0, mode);
6060 create_input_operand (&eops[2], op1, mode);
6061 expand_insn (icode, 3, eops);
6062 m1 = gen_lowpart (mode, eops[0].value);
6063
6064 create_output_operand (&eops[0], gen_reg_rtx (wmode), wmode);
6065 create_input_operand (&eops[1], op0, mode);
6066 create_input_operand (&eops[2], op1, mode);
6067 expand_insn (optab_handler (tab2, mode), 3, eops);
6068 m2 = gen_lowpart (mode, eops[0].value);
6069
6070 vec_perm_builder sel;
6071 if (method == 2)
6072 {
6073 /* The encoding has 2 interleaved stepped patterns. */
6074 sel.new_vector (GET_MODE_NUNITS (mode), 2, 3);
6075 for (i = 0; i < 6; ++i)
6076 sel.quick_push (!BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN + (i & ~1)
6077 + ((i & 1) ? GET_MODE_NUNITS (mode) : 0));
6078 }
6079 else
6080 {
6081 /* The encoding has a single interleaved stepped pattern. */
6082 sel.new_vector (GET_MODE_NUNITS (mode), 1, 3);
6083 for (i = 0; i < 3; ++i)
6084 sel.quick_push (2 * i + (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN ? 0 : 1));
6085 }
6086
6087 return expand_vec_perm_const (mode, m1, m2, sel, BLKmode, target);
6088 }
6089
6090 /* Helper function to find the MODE_CC set in a sync_compare_and_swap
6091 pattern. */
6092
6093 static void
find_cc_set(rtx x,const_rtx pat,void * data)6094 find_cc_set (rtx x, const_rtx pat, void *data)
6095 {
6096 if (REG_P (x) && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_CC
6097 && GET_CODE (pat) == SET)
6098 {
6099 rtx *p_cc_reg = (rtx *) data;
6100 gcc_assert (!*p_cc_reg);
6101 *p_cc_reg = x;
6102 }
6103 }
6104
6105 /* This is a helper function for the other atomic operations. This function
6106 emits a loop that contains SEQ that iterates until a compare-and-swap
6107 operation at the end succeeds. MEM is the memory to be modified. SEQ is
6108 a set of instructions that takes a value from OLD_REG as an input and
6109 produces a value in NEW_REG as an output. Before SEQ, OLD_REG will be
6110 set to the current contents of MEM. After SEQ, a compare-and-swap will
6111 attempt to update MEM with NEW_REG. The function returns true when the
6112 loop was generated successfully. */
6113
6114 static bool
expand_compare_and_swap_loop(rtx mem,rtx old_reg,rtx new_reg,rtx seq)6115 expand_compare_and_swap_loop (rtx mem, rtx old_reg, rtx new_reg, rtx seq)
6116 {
6117 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (mem);
6118 rtx_code_label *label;
6119 rtx cmp_reg, success, oldval;
6120
6121 /* The loop we want to generate looks like
6122
6123 cmp_reg = mem;
6124 label:
6125 old_reg = cmp_reg;
6126 seq;
6127 (success, cmp_reg) = compare-and-swap(mem, old_reg, new_reg)
6128 if (success)
6129 goto label;
6130
6131 Note that we only do the plain load from memory once. Subsequent
6132 iterations use the value loaded by the compare-and-swap pattern. */
6133
6134 label = gen_label_rtx ();
6135 cmp_reg = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
6136
6137 emit_move_insn (cmp_reg, mem);
6138 emit_label (label);
6139 emit_move_insn (old_reg, cmp_reg);
6140 if (seq)
6141 emit_insn (seq);
6142
6143 success = NULL_RTX;
6144 oldval = cmp_reg;
6145 if (!expand_atomic_compare_and_swap (&success, &oldval, mem, old_reg,
6146 new_reg, false, MEMMODEL_SYNC_SEQ_CST,
6147 MEMMODEL_RELAXED))
6148 return false;
6149
6150 if (oldval != cmp_reg)
6151 emit_move_insn (cmp_reg, oldval);
6152
6153 /* Mark this jump predicted not taken. */
6154 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (success, const0_rtx, EQ, const0_rtx,
6155 GET_MODE (success), 1, label,
6156 profile_probability::guessed_never ());
6157 return true;
6158 }
6159
6160
6161 /* This function tries to emit an atomic_exchange intruction. VAL is written
6162 to *MEM using memory model MODEL. The previous contents of *MEM are returned,
6163 using TARGET if possible. */
6164
6165 static rtx
maybe_emit_atomic_exchange(rtx target,rtx mem,rtx val,enum memmodel model)6166 maybe_emit_atomic_exchange (rtx target, rtx mem, rtx val, enum memmodel model)
6167 {
6168 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (mem);
6169 enum insn_code icode;
6170
6171 /* If the target supports the exchange directly, great. */
6172 icode = direct_optab_handler (atomic_exchange_optab, mode);
6173 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
6174 {
6175 class expand_operand ops[4];
6176
6177 create_output_operand (&ops[0], target, mode);
6178 create_fixed_operand (&ops[1], mem);
6179 create_input_operand (&ops[2], val, mode);
6180 create_integer_operand (&ops[3], model);
6181 if (maybe_expand_insn (icode, 4, ops))
6182 return ops[0].value;
6183 }
6184
6185 return NULL_RTX;
6186 }
6187
6188 /* This function tries to implement an atomic exchange operation using
6189 __sync_lock_test_and_set. VAL is written to *MEM using memory model MODEL.
6190 The previous contents of *MEM are returned, using TARGET if possible.
6191 Since this instructionn is an acquire barrier only, stronger memory
6192 models may require additional barriers to be emitted. */
6193
6194 static rtx
maybe_emit_sync_lock_test_and_set(rtx target,rtx mem,rtx val,enum memmodel model)6195 maybe_emit_sync_lock_test_and_set (rtx target, rtx mem, rtx val,
6196 enum memmodel model)
6197 {
6198 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (mem);
6199 enum insn_code icode;
6200 rtx_insn *last_insn = get_last_insn ();
6201
6202 icode = optab_handler (sync_lock_test_and_set_optab, mode);
6203
6204 /* Legacy sync_lock_test_and_set is an acquire barrier. If the pattern
6205 exists, and the memory model is stronger than acquire, add a release
6206 barrier before the instruction. */
6207
6208 if (is_mm_seq_cst (model) || is_mm_release (model) || is_mm_acq_rel (model))
6209 expand_mem_thread_fence (model);
6210
6211 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
6212 {
6213 class expand_operand ops[3];
6214 create_output_operand (&ops[0], target, mode);
6215 create_fixed_operand (&ops[1], mem);
6216 create_input_operand (&ops[2], val, mode);
6217 if (maybe_expand_insn (icode, 3, ops))
6218 return ops[0].value;
6219 }
6220
6221 /* If an external test-and-set libcall is provided, use that instead of
6222 any external compare-and-swap that we might get from the compare-and-
6223 swap-loop expansion later. */
6224 if (!can_compare_and_swap_p (mode, false))
6225 {
6226 rtx libfunc = optab_libfunc (sync_lock_test_and_set_optab, mode);
6227 if (libfunc != NULL)
6228 {
6229 rtx addr;
6230
6231 addr = convert_memory_address (ptr_mode, XEXP (mem, 0));
6232 return emit_library_call_value (libfunc, NULL_RTX, LCT_NORMAL,
6233 mode, addr, ptr_mode,
6234 val, mode);
6235 }
6236 }
6237
6238 /* If the test_and_set can't be emitted, eliminate any barrier that might
6239 have been emitted. */
6240 delete_insns_since (last_insn);
6241 return NULL_RTX;
6242 }
6243
6244 /* This function tries to implement an atomic exchange operation using a
6245 compare_and_swap loop. VAL is written to *MEM. The previous contents of
6246 *MEM are returned, using TARGET if possible. No memory model is required
6247 since a compare_and_swap loop is seq-cst. */
6248
6249 static rtx
maybe_emit_compare_and_swap_exchange_loop(rtx target,rtx mem,rtx val)6250 maybe_emit_compare_and_swap_exchange_loop (rtx target, rtx mem, rtx val)
6251 {
6252 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (mem);
6253
6254 if (can_compare_and_swap_p (mode, true))
6255 {
6256 if (!target || !register_operand (target, mode))
6257 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
6258 if (expand_compare_and_swap_loop (mem, target, val, NULL_RTX))
6259 return target;
6260 }
6261
6262 return NULL_RTX;
6263 }
6264
6265 /* This function tries to implement an atomic test-and-set operation
6266 using the atomic_test_and_set instruction pattern. A boolean value
6267 is returned from the operation, using TARGET if possible. */
6268
6269 static rtx
maybe_emit_atomic_test_and_set(rtx target,rtx mem,enum memmodel model)6270 maybe_emit_atomic_test_and_set (rtx target, rtx mem, enum memmodel model)
6271 {
6272 machine_mode pat_bool_mode;
6273 class expand_operand ops[3];
6274
6275 if (!targetm.have_atomic_test_and_set ())
6276 return NULL_RTX;
6277
6278 /* While we always get QImode from __atomic_test_and_set, we get
6279 other memory modes from __sync_lock_test_and_set. Note that we
6280 use no endian adjustment here. This matches the 4.6 behavior
6281 in the Sparc backend. */
6282 enum insn_code icode = targetm.code_for_atomic_test_and_set;
6283 gcc_checking_assert (insn_data[icode].operand[1].mode == QImode);
6284 if (GET_MODE (mem) != QImode)
6285 mem = adjust_address_nv (mem, QImode, 0);
6286
6287 pat_bool_mode = insn_data[icode].operand[0].mode;
6288 create_output_operand (&ops[0], target, pat_bool_mode);
6289 create_fixed_operand (&ops[1], mem);
6290 create_integer_operand (&ops[2], model);
6291
6292 if (maybe_expand_insn (icode, 3, ops))
6293 return ops[0].value;
6294 return NULL_RTX;
6295 }
6296
6297 /* This function expands the legacy _sync_lock test_and_set operation which is
6298 generally an atomic exchange. Some limited targets only allow the
6299 constant 1 to be stored. This is an ACQUIRE operation.
6300
6301 TARGET is an optional place to stick the return value.
6302 MEM is where VAL is stored. */
6303
6304 rtx
expand_sync_lock_test_and_set(rtx target,rtx mem,rtx val)6305 expand_sync_lock_test_and_set (rtx target, rtx mem, rtx val)
6306 {
6307 rtx ret;
6308
6309 /* Try an atomic_exchange first. */
6310 ret = maybe_emit_atomic_exchange (target, mem, val, MEMMODEL_SYNC_ACQUIRE);
6311 if (ret)
6312 return ret;
6313
6314 ret = maybe_emit_sync_lock_test_and_set (target, mem, val,
6315 MEMMODEL_SYNC_ACQUIRE);
6316 if (ret)
6317 return ret;
6318
6319 ret = maybe_emit_compare_and_swap_exchange_loop (target, mem, val);
6320 if (ret)
6321 return ret;
6322
6323 /* If there are no other options, try atomic_test_and_set if the value
6324 being stored is 1. */
6325 if (val == const1_rtx)
6326 ret = maybe_emit_atomic_test_and_set (target, mem, MEMMODEL_SYNC_ACQUIRE);
6327
6328 return ret;
6329 }
6330
6331 /* This function expands the atomic test_and_set operation:
6332 atomically store a boolean TRUE into MEM and return the previous value.
6333
6334 MEMMODEL is the memory model variant to use.
6335 TARGET is an optional place to stick the return value. */
6336
6337 rtx
expand_atomic_test_and_set(rtx target,rtx mem,enum memmodel model)6338 expand_atomic_test_and_set (rtx target, rtx mem, enum memmodel model)
6339 {
6340 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (mem);
6341 rtx ret, trueval, subtarget;
6342
6343 ret = maybe_emit_atomic_test_and_set (target, mem, model);
6344 if (ret)
6345 return ret;
6346
6347 /* Be binary compatible with non-default settings of trueval, and different
6348 cpu revisions. E.g. one revision may have atomic-test-and-set, but
6349 another only has atomic-exchange. */
6350 if (targetm.atomic_test_and_set_trueval == 1)
6351 {
6352 trueval = const1_rtx;
6353 subtarget = target ? target : gen_reg_rtx (mode);
6354 }
6355 else
6356 {
6357 trueval = gen_int_mode (targetm.atomic_test_and_set_trueval, mode);
6358 subtarget = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
6359 }
6360
6361 /* Try the atomic-exchange optab... */
6362 ret = maybe_emit_atomic_exchange (subtarget, mem, trueval, model);
6363
6364 /* ... then an atomic-compare-and-swap loop ... */
6365 if (!ret)
6366 ret = maybe_emit_compare_and_swap_exchange_loop (subtarget, mem, trueval);
6367
6368 /* ... before trying the vaguely defined legacy lock_test_and_set. */
6369 if (!ret)
6370 ret = maybe_emit_sync_lock_test_and_set (subtarget, mem, trueval, model);
6371
6372 /* Recall that the legacy lock_test_and_set optab was allowed to do magic
6373 things with the value 1. Thus we try again without trueval. */
6374 if (!ret && targetm.atomic_test_and_set_trueval != 1)
6375 ret = maybe_emit_sync_lock_test_and_set (subtarget, mem, const1_rtx, model);
6376
6377 /* Failing all else, assume a single threaded environment and simply
6378 perform the operation. */
6379 if (!ret)
6380 {
6381 /* If the result is ignored skip the move to target. */
6382 if (subtarget != const0_rtx)
6383 emit_move_insn (subtarget, mem);
6384
6385 emit_move_insn (mem, trueval);
6386 ret = subtarget;
6387 }
6388
6389 /* Recall that have to return a boolean value; rectify if trueval
6390 is not exactly one. */
6391 if (targetm.atomic_test_and_set_trueval != 1)
6392 ret = emit_store_flag_force (target, NE, ret, const0_rtx, mode, 0, 1);
6393
6394 return ret;
6395 }
6396
6397 /* This function expands the atomic exchange operation:
6398 atomically store VAL in MEM and return the previous value in MEM.
6399
6400 MEMMODEL is the memory model variant to use.
6401 TARGET is an optional place to stick the return value. */
6402
6403 rtx
expand_atomic_exchange(rtx target,rtx mem,rtx val,enum memmodel model)6404 expand_atomic_exchange (rtx target, rtx mem, rtx val, enum memmodel model)
6405 {
6406 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (mem);
6407 rtx ret;
6408
6409 /* If loads are not atomic for the required size and we are not called to
6410 provide a __sync builtin, do not do anything so that we stay consistent
6411 with atomic loads of the same size. */
6412 if (!can_atomic_load_p (mode) && !is_mm_sync (model))
6413 return NULL_RTX;
6414
6415 ret = maybe_emit_atomic_exchange (target, mem, val, model);
6416
6417 /* Next try a compare-and-swap loop for the exchange. */
6418 if (!ret)
6419 ret = maybe_emit_compare_and_swap_exchange_loop (target, mem, val);
6420
6421 return ret;
6422 }
6423
6424 /* This function expands the atomic compare exchange operation:
6425
6426 *PTARGET_BOOL is an optional place to store the boolean success/failure.
6427 *PTARGET_OVAL is an optional place to store the old value from memory.
6428 Both target parameters may be NULL or const0_rtx to indicate that we do
6429 not care about that return value. Both target parameters are updated on
6430 success to the actual location of the corresponding result.
6431
6432 MEMMODEL is the memory model variant to use.
6433
6434 The return value of the function is true for success. */
6435
6436 bool
expand_atomic_compare_and_swap(rtx * ptarget_bool,rtx * ptarget_oval,rtx mem,rtx expected,rtx desired,bool is_weak,enum memmodel succ_model,enum memmodel fail_model)6437 expand_atomic_compare_and_swap (rtx *ptarget_bool, rtx *ptarget_oval,
6438 rtx mem, rtx expected, rtx desired,
6439 bool is_weak, enum memmodel succ_model,
6440 enum memmodel fail_model)
6441 {
6442 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (mem);
6443 class expand_operand ops[8];
6444 enum insn_code icode;
6445 rtx target_oval, target_bool = NULL_RTX;
6446 rtx libfunc;
6447
6448 /* If loads are not atomic for the required size and we are not called to
6449 provide a __sync builtin, do not do anything so that we stay consistent
6450 with atomic loads of the same size. */
6451 if (!can_atomic_load_p (mode) && !is_mm_sync (succ_model))
6452 return false;
6453
6454 /* Load expected into a register for the compare and swap. */
6455 if (MEM_P (expected))
6456 expected = copy_to_reg (expected);
6457
6458 /* Make sure we always have some place to put the return oldval.
6459 Further, make sure that place is distinct from the input expected,
6460 just in case we need that path down below. */
6461 if (ptarget_oval && *ptarget_oval == const0_rtx)
6462 ptarget_oval = NULL;
6463
6464 if (ptarget_oval == NULL
6465 || (target_oval = *ptarget_oval) == NULL
6466 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (expected, target_oval))
6467 target_oval = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
6468
6469 icode = direct_optab_handler (atomic_compare_and_swap_optab, mode);
6470 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
6471 {
6472 machine_mode bool_mode = insn_data[icode].operand[0].mode;
6473
6474 if (ptarget_bool && *ptarget_bool == const0_rtx)
6475 ptarget_bool = NULL;
6476
6477 /* Make sure we always have a place for the bool operand. */
6478 if (ptarget_bool == NULL
6479 || (target_bool = *ptarget_bool) == NULL
6480 || GET_MODE (target_bool) != bool_mode)
6481 target_bool = gen_reg_rtx (bool_mode);
6482
6483 /* Emit the compare_and_swap. */
6484 create_output_operand (&ops[0], target_bool, bool_mode);
6485 create_output_operand (&ops[1], target_oval, mode);
6486 create_fixed_operand (&ops[2], mem);
6487 create_input_operand (&ops[3], expected, mode);
6488 create_input_operand (&ops[4], desired, mode);
6489 create_integer_operand (&ops[5], is_weak);
6490 create_integer_operand (&ops[6], succ_model);
6491 create_integer_operand (&ops[7], fail_model);
6492 if (maybe_expand_insn (icode, 8, ops))
6493 {
6494 /* Return success/failure. */
6495 target_bool = ops[0].value;
6496 target_oval = ops[1].value;
6497 goto success;
6498 }
6499 }
6500
6501 /* Otherwise fall back to the original __sync_val_compare_and_swap
6502 which is always seq-cst. */
6503 icode = optab_handler (sync_compare_and_swap_optab, mode);
6504 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
6505 {
6506 rtx cc_reg;
6507
6508 create_output_operand (&ops[0], target_oval, mode);
6509 create_fixed_operand (&ops[1], mem);
6510 create_input_operand (&ops[2], expected, mode);
6511 create_input_operand (&ops[3], desired, mode);
6512 if (!maybe_expand_insn (icode, 4, ops))
6513 return false;
6514
6515 target_oval = ops[0].value;
6516
6517 /* If the caller isn't interested in the boolean return value,
6518 skip the computation of it. */
6519 if (ptarget_bool == NULL)
6520 goto success;
6521
6522 /* Otherwise, work out if the compare-and-swap succeeded. */
6523 cc_reg = NULL_RTX;
6524 if (have_insn_for (COMPARE, CCmode))
6525 note_stores (get_last_insn (), find_cc_set, &cc_reg);
6526 if (cc_reg)
6527 {
6528 target_bool = emit_store_flag_force (target_bool, EQ, cc_reg,
6529 const0_rtx, VOIDmode, 0, 1);
6530 goto success;
6531 }
6532 goto success_bool_from_val;
6533 }
6534
6535 /* Also check for library support for __sync_val_compare_and_swap. */
6536 libfunc = optab_libfunc (sync_compare_and_swap_optab, mode);
6537 if (libfunc != NULL)
6538 {
6539 rtx addr = convert_memory_address (ptr_mode, XEXP (mem, 0));
6540 rtx target = emit_library_call_value (libfunc, NULL_RTX, LCT_NORMAL,
6541 mode, addr, ptr_mode,
6542 expected, mode, desired, mode);
6543 emit_move_insn (target_oval, target);
6544
6545 /* Compute the boolean return value only if requested. */
6546 if (ptarget_bool)
6547 goto success_bool_from_val;
6548 else
6549 goto success;
6550 }
6551
6552 /* Failure. */
6553 return false;
6554
6555 success_bool_from_val:
6556 target_bool = emit_store_flag_force (target_bool, EQ, target_oval,
6557 expected, VOIDmode, 1, 1);
6558 success:
6559 /* Make sure that the oval output winds up where the caller asked. */
6560 if (ptarget_oval)
6561 *ptarget_oval = target_oval;
6562 if (ptarget_bool)
6563 *ptarget_bool = target_bool;
6564 return true;
6565 }
6566
6567 /* Generate asm volatile("" : : : "memory") as the memory blockage. */
6568
6569 static void
expand_asm_memory_blockage(void)6570 expand_asm_memory_blockage (void)
6571 {
6572 rtx asm_op, clob;
6573
6574 asm_op = gen_rtx_ASM_OPERANDS (VOIDmode, "", "", 0,
6575 rtvec_alloc (0), rtvec_alloc (0),
6576 rtvec_alloc (0), UNKNOWN_LOCATION);
6577 MEM_VOLATILE_P (asm_op) = 1;
6578
6579 clob = gen_rtx_SCRATCH (VOIDmode);
6580 clob = gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode, clob);
6581 clob = gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, clob);
6582
6583 emit_insn (gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode, gen_rtvec (2, asm_op, clob)));
6584 }
6585
6586 /* Do not propagate memory accesses across this point. */
6587
6588 static void
expand_memory_blockage(void)6589 expand_memory_blockage (void)
6590 {
6591 if (targetm.have_memory_blockage ())
6592 emit_insn (targetm.gen_memory_blockage ());
6593 else
6594 expand_asm_memory_blockage ();
6595 }
6596
6597 /* This routine will either emit the mem_thread_fence pattern or issue a
6598 sync_synchronize to generate a fence for memory model MEMMODEL. */
6599
6600 void
expand_mem_thread_fence(enum memmodel model)6601 expand_mem_thread_fence (enum memmodel model)
6602 {
6603 if (is_mm_relaxed (model))
6604 return;
6605 if (targetm.have_mem_thread_fence ())
6606 {
6607 emit_insn (targetm.gen_mem_thread_fence (GEN_INT (model)));
6608 expand_memory_blockage ();
6609 }
6610 else if (targetm.have_memory_barrier ())
6611 emit_insn (targetm.gen_memory_barrier ());
6612 else if (synchronize_libfunc != NULL_RTX)
6613 emit_library_call (synchronize_libfunc, LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode);
6614 else
6615 expand_memory_blockage ();
6616 }
6617
6618 /* Emit a signal fence with given memory model. */
6619
6620 void
expand_mem_signal_fence(enum memmodel model)6621 expand_mem_signal_fence (enum memmodel model)
6622 {
6623 /* No machine barrier is required to implement a signal fence, but
6624 a compiler memory barrier must be issued, except for relaxed MM. */
6625 if (!is_mm_relaxed (model))
6626 expand_memory_blockage ();
6627 }
6628
6629 /* This function expands the atomic load operation:
6630 return the atomically loaded value in MEM.
6631
6632 MEMMODEL is the memory model variant to use.
6633 TARGET is an option place to stick the return value. */
6634
6635 rtx
expand_atomic_load(rtx target,rtx mem,enum memmodel model)6636 expand_atomic_load (rtx target, rtx mem, enum memmodel model)
6637 {
6638 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (mem);
6639 enum insn_code icode;
6640
6641 /* If the target supports the load directly, great. */
6642 icode = direct_optab_handler (atomic_load_optab, mode);
6643 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
6644 {
6645 class expand_operand ops[3];
6646 rtx_insn *last = get_last_insn ();
6647 if (is_mm_seq_cst (model))
6648 expand_memory_blockage ();
6649
6650 create_output_operand (&ops[0], target, mode);
6651 create_fixed_operand (&ops[1], mem);
6652 create_integer_operand (&ops[2], model);
6653 if (maybe_expand_insn (icode, 3, ops))
6654 {
6655 if (!is_mm_relaxed (model))
6656 expand_memory_blockage ();
6657 return ops[0].value;
6658 }
6659 delete_insns_since (last);
6660 }
6661
6662 /* If the size of the object is greater than word size on this target,
6663 then we assume that a load will not be atomic. We could try to
6664 emulate a load with a compare-and-swap operation, but the store that
6665 doing this could result in would be incorrect if this is a volatile
6666 atomic load or targetting read-only-mapped memory. */
6667 if (maybe_gt (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode), BITS_PER_WORD))
6668 /* If there is no atomic load, leave the library call. */
6669 return NULL_RTX;
6670
6671 /* Otherwise assume loads are atomic, and emit the proper barriers. */
6672 if (!target || target == const0_rtx)
6673 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
6674
6675 /* For SEQ_CST, emit a barrier before the load. */
6676 if (is_mm_seq_cst (model))
6677 expand_mem_thread_fence (model);
6678
6679 emit_move_insn (target, mem);
6680
6681 /* Emit the appropriate barrier after the load. */
6682 expand_mem_thread_fence (model);
6683
6684 return target;
6685 }
6686
6687 /* This function expands the atomic store operation:
6688 Atomically store VAL in MEM.
6689 MEMMODEL is the memory model variant to use.
6690 USE_RELEASE is true if __sync_lock_release can be used as a fall back.
6691 function returns const0_rtx if a pattern was emitted. */
6692
6693 rtx
expand_atomic_store(rtx mem,rtx val,enum memmodel model,bool use_release)6694 expand_atomic_store (rtx mem, rtx val, enum memmodel model, bool use_release)
6695 {
6696 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (mem);
6697 enum insn_code icode;
6698 class expand_operand ops[3];
6699
6700 /* If the target supports the store directly, great. */
6701 icode = direct_optab_handler (atomic_store_optab, mode);
6702 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
6703 {
6704 rtx_insn *last = get_last_insn ();
6705 if (!is_mm_relaxed (model))
6706 expand_memory_blockage ();
6707 create_fixed_operand (&ops[0], mem);
6708 create_input_operand (&ops[1], val, mode);
6709 create_integer_operand (&ops[2], model);
6710 if (maybe_expand_insn (icode, 3, ops))
6711 {
6712 if (is_mm_seq_cst (model))
6713 expand_memory_blockage ();
6714 return const0_rtx;
6715 }
6716 delete_insns_since (last);
6717 }
6718
6719 /* If using __sync_lock_release is a viable alternative, try it.
6720 Note that this will not be set to true if we are expanding a generic
6721 __atomic_store_n. */
6722 if (use_release)
6723 {
6724 icode = direct_optab_handler (sync_lock_release_optab, mode);
6725 if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing)
6726 {
6727 create_fixed_operand (&ops[0], mem);
6728 create_input_operand (&ops[1], const0_rtx, mode);
6729 if (maybe_expand_insn (icode, 2, ops))
6730 {
6731 /* lock_release is only a release barrier. */
6732 if (is_mm_seq_cst (model))
6733 expand_mem_thread_fence (model);
6734 return const0_rtx;
6735 }
6736 }
6737 }
6738
6739 /* If the size of the object is greater than word size on this target,
6740 a default store will not be atomic. */
6741 if (maybe_gt (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode), BITS_PER_WORD))
6742 {
6743 /* If loads are atomic or we are called to provide a __sync builtin,
6744 we can try a atomic_exchange and throw away the result. Otherwise,
6745 don't do anything so that we do not create an inconsistency between
6746 loads and stores. */
6747 if (can_atomic_load_p (mode) || is_mm_sync (model))
6748 {
6749 rtx target = maybe_emit_atomic_exchange (NULL_RTX, mem, val, model);
6750 if (!target)
6751 target = maybe_emit_compare_and_swap_exchange_loop (NULL_RTX, mem,
6752 val);
6753 if (target)
6754 return const0_rtx;
6755 }
6756 return NULL_RTX;
6757 }
6758
6759 /* Otherwise assume stores are atomic, and emit the proper barriers. */
6760 expand_mem_thread_fence (model);
6761
6762 emit_move_insn (mem, val);
6763
6764 /* For SEQ_CST, also emit a barrier after the store. */
6765 if (is_mm_seq_cst (model))
6766 expand_mem_thread_fence (model);
6767
6768 return const0_rtx;
6769 }
6770
6771
6772 /* Structure containing the pointers and values required to process the
6773 various forms of the atomic_fetch_op and atomic_op_fetch builtins. */
6774
6775 struct atomic_op_functions
6776 {
6777 direct_optab mem_fetch_before;
6778 direct_optab mem_fetch_after;
6779 direct_optab mem_no_result;
6780 optab fetch_before;
6781 optab fetch_after;
6782 direct_optab no_result;
6783 enum rtx_code reverse_code;
6784 };
6785
6786
6787 /* Fill in structure pointed to by OP with the various optab entries for an
6788 operation of type CODE. */
6789
6790 static void
get_atomic_op_for_code(struct atomic_op_functions * op,enum rtx_code code)6791 get_atomic_op_for_code (struct atomic_op_functions *op, enum rtx_code code)
6792 {
6793 gcc_assert (op!= NULL);
6794
6795 /* If SWITCHABLE_TARGET is defined, then subtargets can be switched
6796 in the source code during compilation, and the optab entries are not
6797 computable until runtime. Fill in the values at runtime. */
6798 switch (code)
6799 {
6800 case PLUS:
6801 op->mem_fetch_before = atomic_fetch_add_optab;
6802 op->mem_fetch_after = atomic_add_fetch_optab;
6803 op->mem_no_result = atomic_add_optab;
6804 op->fetch_before = sync_old_add_optab;
6805 op->fetch_after = sync_new_add_optab;
6806 op->no_result = sync_add_optab;
6807 op->reverse_code = MINUS;
6808 break;
6809 case MINUS:
6810 op->mem_fetch_before = atomic_fetch_sub_optab;
6811 op->mem_fetch_after = atomic_sub_fetch_optab;
6812 op->mem_no_result = atomic_sub_optab;
6813 op->fetch_before = sync_old_sub_optab;
6814 op->fetch_after = sync_new_sub_optab;
6815 op->no_result = sync_sub_optab;
6816 op->reverse_code = PLUS;
6817 break;
6818 case XOR:
6819 op->mem_fetch_before = atomic_fetch_xor_optab;
6820 op->mem_fetch_after = atomic_xor_fetch_optab;
6821 op->mem_no_result = atomic_xor_optab;
6822 op->fetch_before = sync_old_xor_optab;
6823 op->fetch_after = sync_new_xor_optab;
6824 op->no_result = sync_xor_optab;
6825 op->reverse_code = XOR;
6826 break;
6827 case AND:
6828 op->mem_fetch_before = atomic_fetch_and_optab;
6829 op->mem_fetch_after = atomic_and_fetch_optab;
6830 op->mem_no_result = atomic_and_optab;
6831 op->fetch_before = sync_old_and_optab;
6832 op->fetch_after = sync_new_and_optab;
6833 op->no_result = sync_and_optab;
6834 op->reverse_code = UNKNOWN;
6835 break;
6836 case IOR:
6837 op->mem_fetch_before = atomic_fetch_or_optab;
6838 op->mem_fetch_after = atomic_or_fetch_optab;
6839 op->mem_no_result = atomic_or_optab;
6840 op->fetch_before = sync_old_ior_optab;
6841 op->fetch_after = sync_new_ior_optab;
6842 op->no_result = sync_ior_optab;
6843 op->reverse_code = UNKNOWN;
6844 break;
6845 case NOT:
6846 op->mem_fetch_before = atomic_fetch_nand_optab;
6847 op->mem_fetch_after = atomic_nand_fetch_optab;
6848 op->mem_no_result = atomic_nand_optab;
6849 op->fetch_before = sync_old_nand_optab;
6850 op->fetch_after = sync_new_nand_optab;
6851 op->no_result = sync_nand_optab;
6852 op->reverse_code = UNKNOWN;
6853 break;
6854 default:
6855 gcc_unreachable ();
6856 }
6857 }
6858
6859 /* See if there is a more optimal way to implement the operation "*MEM CODE VAL"
6860 using memory order MODEL. If AFTER is true the operation needs to return
6861 the value of *MEM after the operation, otherwise the previous value.
6862 TARGET is an optional place to place the result. The result is unused if
6863 it is const0_rtx.
6864 Return the result if there is a better sequence, otherwise NULL_RTX. */
6865
6866 static rtx
maybe_optimize_fetch_op(rtx target,rtx mem,rtx val,enum rtx_code code,enum memmodel model,bool after)6867 maybe_optimize_fetch_op (rtx target, rtx mem, rtx val, enum rtx_code code,
6868 enum memmodel model, bool after)
6869 {
6870 /* If the value is prefetched, or not used, it may be possible to replace
6871 the sequence with a native exchange operation. */
6872 if (!after || target == const0_rtx)
6873 {
6874 /* fetch_and (&x, 0, m) can be replaced with exchange (&x, 0, m). */
6875 if (code == AND && val == const0_rtx)
6876 {
6877 if (target == const0_rtx)
6878 target = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (mem));
6879 return maybe_emit_atomic_exchange (target, mem, val, model);
6880 }
6881
6882 /* fetch_or (&x, -1, m) can be replaced with exchange (&x, -1, m). */
6883 if (code == IOR && val == constm1_rtx)
6884 {
6885 if (target == const0_rtx)
6886 target = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (mem));
6887 return maybe_emit_atomic_exchange (target, mem, val, model);
6888 }
6889 }
6890
6891 return NULL_RTX;
6892 }
6893
6894 /* Try to emit an instruction for a specific operation varaition.
6895 OPTAB contains the OP functions.
6896 TARGET is an optional place to return the result. const0_rtx means unused.
6897 MEM is the memory location to operate on.
6898 VAL is the value to use in the operation.
6899 USE_MEMMODEL is TRUE if the variation with a memory model should be tried.
6900 MODEL is the memory model, if used.
6901 AFTER is true if the returned result is the value after the operation. */
6902
6903 static rtx
maybe_emit_op(const struct atomic_op_functions * optab,rtx target,rtx mem,rtx val,bool use_memmodel,enum memmodel model,bool after)6904 maybe_emit_op (const struct atomic_op_functions *optab, rtx target, rtx mem,
6905 rtx val, bool use_memmodel, enum memmodel model, bool after)
6906 {
6907 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (mem);
6908 class expand_operand ops[4];
6909 enum insn_code icode;
6910 int op_counter = 0;
6911 int num_ops;
6912
6913 /* Check to see if there is a result returned. */
6914 if (target == const0_rtx)
6915 {
6916 if (use_memmodel)
6917 {
6918 icode = direct_optab_handler (optab->mem_no_result, mode);
6919 create_integer_operand (&ops[2], model);
6920 num_ops = 3;
6921 }
6922 else
6923 {
6924 icode = direct_optab_handler (optab->no_result, mode);
6925 num_ops = 2;
6926 }
6927 }
6928 /* Otherwise, we need to generate a result. */
6929 else
6930 {
6931 if (use_memmodel)
6932 {
6933 icode = direct_optab_handler (after ? optab->mem_fetch_after
6934 : optab->mem_fetch_before, mode);
6935 create_integer_operand (&ops[3], model);
6936 num_ops = 4;
6937 }
6938 else
6939 {
6940 icode = optab_handler (after ? optab->fetch_after
6941 : optab->fetch_before, mode);
6942 num_ops = 3;
6943 }
6944 create_output_operand (&ops[op_counter++], target, mode);
6945 }
6946 if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing)
6947 return NULL_RTX;
6948
6949 create_fixed_operand (&ops[op_counter++], mem);
6950 /* VAL may have been promoted to a wider mode. Shrink it if so. */
6951 create_convert_operand_to (&ops[op_counter++], val, mode, true);
6952
6953 if (maybe_expand_insn (icode, num_ops, ops))
6954 return (target == const0_rtx ? const0_rtx : ops[0].value);
6955
6956 return NULL_RTX;
6957 }
6958
6959
6960 /* This function expands an atomic fetch_OP or OP_fetch operation:
6961 TARGET is an option place to stick the return value. const0_rtx indicates
6962 the result is unused.
6963 atomically fetch MEM, perform the operation with VAL and return it to MEM.
6964 CODE is the operation being performed (OP)
6965 MEMMODEL is the memory model variant to use.
6966 AFTER is true to return the result of the operation (OP_fetch).
6967 AFTER is false to return the value before the operation (fetch_OP).
6968
6969 This function will *only* generate instructions if there is a direct
6970 optab. No compare and swap loops or libcalls will be generated. */
6971
6972 static rtx
expand_atomic_fetch_op_no_fallback(rtx target,rtx mem,rtx val,enum rtx_code code,enum memmodel model,bool after)6973 expand_atomic_fetch_op_no_fallback (rtx target, rtx mem, rtx val,
6974 enum rtx_code code, enum memmodel model,
6975 bool after)
6976 {
6977 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (mem);
6978 struct atomic_op_functions optab;
6979 rtx result;
6980 bool unused_result = (target == const0_rtx);
6981
6982 get_atomic_op_for_code (&optab, code);
6983
6984 /* Check to see if there are any better instructions. */
6985 result = maybe_optimize_fetch_op (target, mem, val, code, model, after);
6986 if (result)
6987 return result;
6988
6989 /* Check for the case where the result isn't used and try those patterns. */
6990 if (unused_result)
6991 {
6992 /* Try the memory model variant first. */
6993 result = maybe_emit_op (&optab, target, mem, val, true, model, true);
6994 if (result)
6995 return result;
6996
6997 /* Next try the old style withuot a memory model. */
6998 result = maybe_emit_op (&optab, target, mem, val, false, model, true);
6999 if (result)
7000 return result;
7001
7002 /* There is no no-result pattern, so try patterns with a result. */
7003 target = NULL_RTX;
7004 }
7005
7006 /* Try the __atomic version. */
7007 result = maybe_emit_op (&optab, target, mem, val, true, model, after);
7008 if (result)
7009 return result;
7010
7011 /* Try the older __sync version. */
7012 result = maybe_emit_op (&optab, target, mem, val, false, model, after);
7013 if (result)
7014 return result;
7015
7016 /* If the fetch value can be calculated from the other variation of fetch,
7017 try that operation. */
7018 if (after || unused_result || optab.reverse_code != UNKNOWN)
7019 {
7020 /* Try the __atomic version, then the older __sync version. */
7021 result = maybe_emit_op (&optab, target, mem, val, true, model, !after);
7022 if (!result)
7023 result = maybe_emit_op (&optab, target, mem, val, false, model, !after);
7024
7025 if (result)
7026 {
7027 /* If the result isn't used, no need to do compensation code. */
7028 if (unused_result)
7029 return result;
7030
7031 /* Issue compensation code. Fetch_after == fetch_before OP val.
7032 Fetch_before == after REVERSE_OP val. */
7033 if (!after)
7034 code = optab.reverse_code;
7035 if (code == NOT)
7036 {
7037 result = expand_simple_binop (mode, AND, result, val, NULL_RTX,
7038 true, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
7039 result = expand_simple_unop (mode, NOT, result, target, true);
7040 }
7041 else
7042 result = expand_simple_binop (mode, code, result, val, target,
7043 true, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
7044 return result;
7045 }
7046 }
7047
7048 /* No direct opcode can be generated. */
7049 return NULL_RTX;
7050 }
7051
7052
7053
7054 /* This function expands an atomic fetch_OP or OP_fetch operation:
7055 TARGET is an option place to stick the return value. const0_rtx indicates
7056 the result is unused.
7057 atomically fetch MEM, perform the operation with VAL and return it to MEM.
7058 CODE is the operation being performed (OP)
7059 MEMMODEL is the memory model variant to use.
7060 AFTER is true to return the result of the operation (OP_fetch).
7061 AFTER is false to return the value before the operation (fetch_OP). */
7062 rtx
expand_atomic_fetch_op(rtx target,rtx mem,rtx val,enum rtx_code code,enum memmodel model,bool after)7063 expand_atomic_fetch_op (rtx target, rtx mem, rtx val, enum rtx_code code,
7064 enum memmodel model, bool after)
7065 {
7066 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (mem);
7067 rtx result;
7068 bool unused_result = (target == const0_rtx);
7069
7070 /* If loads are not atomic for the required size and we are not called to
7071 provide a __sync builtin, do not do anything so that we stay consistent
7072 with atomic loads of the same size. */
7073 if (!can_atomic_load_p (mode) && !is_mm_sync (model))
7074 return NULL_RTX;
7075
7076 result = expand_atomic_fetch_op_no_fallback (target, mem, val, code, model,
7077 after);
7078
7079 if (result)
7080 return result;
7081
7082 /* Add/sub can be implemented by doing the reverse operation with -(val). */
7083 if (code == PLUS || code == MINUS)
7084 {
7085 rtx tmp;
7086 enum rtx_code reverse = (code == PLUS ? MINUS : PLUS);
7087
7088 start_sequence ();
7089 tmp = expand_simple_unop (mode, NEG, val, NULL_RTX, true);
7090 result = expand_atomic_fetch_op_no_fallback (target, mem, tmp, reverse,
7091 model, after);
7092 if (result)
7093 {
7094 /* PLUS worked so emit the insns and return. */
7095 tmp = get_insns ();
7096 end_sequence ();
7097 emit_insn (tmp);
7098 return result;
7099 }
7100
7101 /* PLUS did not work, so throw away the negation code and continue. */
7102 end_sequence ();
7103 }
7104
7105 /* Try the __sync libcalls only if we can't do compare-and-swap inline. */
7106 if (!can_compare_and_swap_p (mode, false))
7107 {
7108 rtx libfunc;
7109 bool fixup = false;
7110 enum rtx_code orig_code = code;
7111 struct atomic_op_functions optab;
7112
7113 get_atomic_op_for_code (&optab, code);
7114 libfunc = optab_libfunc (after ? optab.fetch_after
7115 : optab.fetch_before, mode);
7116 if (libfunc == NULL
7117 && (after || unused_result || optab.reverse_code != UNKNOWN))
7118 {
7119 fixup = true;
7120 if (!after)
7121 code = optab.reverse_code;
7122 libfunc = optab_libfunc (after ? optab.fetch_before
7123 : optab.fetch_after, mode);
7124 }
7125 if (libfunc != NULL)
7126 {
7127 rtx addr = convert_memory_address (ptr_mode, XEXP (mem, 0));
7128 result = emit_library_call_value (libfunc, NULL, LCT_NORMAL, mode,
7129 addr, ptr_mode, val, mode);
7130
7131 if (!unused_result && fixup)
7132 result = expand_simple_binop (mode, code, result, val, target,
7133 true, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
7134 return result;
7135 }
7136
7137 /* We need the original code for any further attempts. */
7138 code = orig_code;
7139 }
7140
7141 /* If nothing else has succeeded, default to a compare and swap loop. */
7142 if (can_compare_and_swap_p (mode, true))
7143 {
7144 rtx_insn *insn;
7145 rtx t0 = gen_reg_rtx (mode), t1;
7146
7147 start_sequence ();
7148
7149 /* If the result is used, get a register for it. */
7150 if (!unused_result)
7151 {
7152 if (!target || !register_operand (target, mode))
7153 target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
7154 /* If fetch_before, copy the value now. */
7155 if (!after)
7156 emit_move_insn (target, t0);
7157 }
7158 else
7159 target = const0_rtx;
7160
7161 t1 = t0;
7162 if (code == NOT)
7163 {
7164 t1 = expand_simple_binop (mode, AND, t1, val, NULL_RTX,
7165 true, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
7166 t1 = expand_simple_unop (mode, code, t1, NULL_RTX, true);
7167 }
7168 else
7169 t1 = expand_simple_binop (mode, code, t1, val, NULL_RTX, true,
7170 OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
7171
7172 /* For after, copy the value now. */
7173 if (!unused_result && after)
7174 emit_move_insn (target, t1);
7175 insn = get_insns ();
7176 end_sequence ();
7177
7178 if (t1 != NULL && expand_compare_and_swap_loop (mem, t0, t1, insn))
7179 return target;
7180 }
7181
7182 return NULL_RTX;
7183 }
7184
7185 /* Return true if OPERAND is suitable for operand number OPNO of
7186 instruction ICODE. */
7187
7188 bool
insn_operand_matches(enum insn_code icode,unsigned int opno,rtx operand)7189 insn_operand_matches (enum insn_code icode, unsigned int opno, rtx operand)
7190 {
7191 return (!insn_data[(int) icode].operand[opno].predicate
7192 || (insn_data[(int) icode].operand[opno].predicate
7193 (operand, insn_data[(int) icode].operand[opno].mode)));
7194 }
7195
7196 /* TARGET is a target of a multiword operation that we are going to
7197 implement as a series of word-mode operations. Return true if
7198 TARGET is suitable for this purpose. */
7199
7200 bool
valid_multiword_target_p(rtx target)7201 valid_multiword_target_p (rtx target)
7202 {
7203 machine_mode mode;
7204 int i, size;
7205
7206 mode = GET_MODE (target);
7207 if (!GET_MODE_SIZE (mode).is_constant (&size))
7208 return false;
7209 for (i = 0; i < size; i += UNITS_PER_WORD)
7210 if (!validate_subreg (word_mode, mode, target, i))
7211 return false;
7212 return true;
7213 }
7214
7215 /* Make OP describe an input operand that has value INTVAL and that has
7216 no inherent mode. This function should only be used for operands that
7217 are always expand-time constants. The backend may request that INTVAL
7218 be copied into a different kind of rtx, but it must specify the mode
7219 of that rtx if so. */
7220
7221 void
create_integer_operand(class expand_operand * op,poly_int64 intval)7222 create_integer_operand (class expand_operand *op, poly_int64 intval)
7223 {
7224 create_expand_operand (op, EXPAND_INTEGER,
7225 gen_int_mode (intval, MAX_MODE_INT),
7226 VOIDmode, false, intval);
7227 }
7228
7229 /* Like maybe_legitimize_operand, but do not change the code of the
7230 current rtx value. */
7231
7232 static bool
maybe_legitimize_operand_same_code(enum insn_code icode,unsigned int opno,class expand_operand * op)7233 maybe_legitimize_operand_same_code (enum insn_code icode, unsigned int opno,
7234 class expand_operand *op)
7235 {
7236 /* See if the operand matches in its current form. */
7237 if (insn_operand_matches (icode, opno, op->value))
7238 return true;
7239
7240 /* If the operand is a memory whose address has no side effects,
7241 try forcing the address into a non-virtual pseudo register.
7242 The check for side effects is important because copy_to_mode_reg
7243 cannot handle things like auto-modified addresses. */
7244 if (insn_data[(int) icode].operand[opno].allows_mem && MEM_P (op->value))
7245 {
7246 rtx addr, mem;
7247
7248 mem = op->value;
7249 addr = XEXP (mem, 0);
7250 if (!(REG_P (addr) && REGNO (addr) > LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER)
7251 && !side_effects_p (addr))
7252 {
7253 rtx_insn *last;
7254 machine_mode mode;
7255
7256 last = get_last_insn ();
7257 mode = get_address_mode (mem);
7258 mem = replace_equiv_address (mem, copy_to_mode_reg (mode, addr));
7259 if (insn_operand_matches (icode, opno, mem))
7260 {
7261 op->value = mem;
7262 return true;
7263 }
7264 delete_insns_since (last);
7265 }
7266 }
7267
7268 return false;
7269 }
7270
7271 /* Try to make OP match operand OPNO of instruction ICODE. Return true
7272 on success, storing the new operand value back in OP. */
7273
7274 static bool
maybe_legitimize_operand(enum insn_code icode,unsigned int opno,class expand_operand * op)7275 maybe_legitimize_operand (enum insn_code icode, unsigned int opno,
7276 class expand_operand *op)
7277 {
7278 machine_mode mode, imode, tmode;
7279
7280 mode = op->mode;
7281 switch (op->type)
7282 {
7283 case EXPAND_FIXED:
7284 {
7285 temporary_volatile_ok v (true);
7286 return maybe_legitimize_operand_same_code (icode, opno, op);
7287 }
7288
7289 case EXPAND_OUTPUT:
7290 gcc_assert (mode != VOIDmode);
7291 if (op->value
7292 && op->value != const0_rtx
7293 && GET_MODE (op->value) == mode
7294 && maybe_legitimize_operand_same_code (icode, opno, op))
7295 return true;
7296
7297 op->value = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
7298 op->target = 0;
7299 break;
7300
7301 case EXPAND_INPUT:
7302 input:
7303 gcc_assert (mode != VOIDmode);
7304 gcc_assert (GET_MODE (op->value) == VOIDmode
7305 || GET_MODE (op->value) == mode);
7306 if (maybe_legitimize_operand_same_code (icode, opno, op))
7307 return true;
7308
7309 op->value = copy_to_mode_reg (mode, op->value);
7310 break;
7311
7312 case EXPAND_CONVERT_TO:
7313 gcc_assert (mode != VOIDmode);
7314 op->value = convert_to_mode (mode, op->value, op->unsigned_p);
7315 goto input;
7316
7317 case EXPAND_CONVERT_FROM:
7318 if (GET_MODE (op->value) != VOIDmode)
7319 mode = GET_MODE (op->value);
7320 else
7321 /* The caller must tell us what mode this value has. */
7322 gcc_assert (mode != VOIDmode);
7323
7324 imode = insn_data[(int) icode].operand[opno].mode;
7325 tmode = (VECTOR_MODE_P (imode) && !VECTOR_MODE_P (mode)
7326 ? GET_MODE_INNER (imode) : imode);
7327 if (tmode != VOIDmode && tmode != mode)
7328 {
7329 op->value = convert_modes (tmode, mode, op->value, op->unsigned_p);
7330 mode = tmode;
7331 }
7332 if (imode != VOIDmode && imode != mode)
7333 {
7334 gcc_assert (VECTOR_MODE_P (imode) && !VECTOR_MODE_P (mode));
7335 op->value = expand_vector_broadcast (imode, op->value);
7336 mode = imode;
7337 }
7338 goto input;
7339
7340 case EXPAND_ADDRESS:
7341 op->value = convert_memory_address (as_a <scalar_int_mode> (mode),
7342 op->value);
7343 goto input;
7344
7345 case EXPAND_INTEGER:
7346 mode = insn_data[(int) icode].operand[opno].mode;
7347 if (mode != VOIDmode
7348 && known_eq (trunc_int_for_mode (op->int_value, mode),
7349 op->int_value))
7350 {
7351 op->value = gen_int_mode (op->int_value, mode);
7352 goto input;
7353 }
7354 break;
7355 }
7356 return insn_operand_matches (icode, opno, op->value);
7357 }
7358
7359 /* Make OP describe an input operand that should have the same value
7360 as VALUE, after any mode conversion that the target might request.
7361 TYPE is the type of VALUE. */
7362
7363 void
create_convert_operand_from_type(class expand_operand * op,rtx value,tree type)7364 create_convert_operand_from_type (class expand_operand *op,
7365 rtx value, tree type)
7366 {
7367 create_convert_operand_from (op, value, TYPE_MODE (type),
7368 TYPE_UNSIGNED (type));
7369 }
7370
7371 /* Return true if the requirements on operands OP1 and OP2 of instruction
7372 ICODE are similar enough for the result of legitimizing OP1 to be
7373 reusable for OP2. OPNO1 and OPNO2 are the operand numbers associated
7374 with OP1 and OP2 respectively. */
7375
7376 static inline bool
can_reuse_operands_p(enum insn_code icode,unsigned int opno1,unsigned int opno2,const class expand_operand * op1,const class expand_operand * op2)7377 can_reuse_operands_p (enum insn_code icode,
7378 unsigned int opno1, unsigned int opno2,
7379 const class expand_operand *op1,
7380 const class expand_operand *op2)
7381 {
7382 /* Check requirements that are common to all types. */
7383 if (op1->type != op2->type
7384 || op1->mode != op2->mode
7385 || (insn_data[(int) icode].operand[opno1].mode
7386 != insn_data[(int) icode].operand[opno2].mode))
7387 return false;
7388
7389 /* Check the requirements for specific types. */
7390 switch (op1->type)
7391 {
7392 case EXPAND_OUTPUT:
7393 /* Outputs must remain distinct. */
7394 return false;
7395
7396 case EXPAND_FIXED:
7397 case EXPAND_INPUT:
7398 case EXPAND_ADDRESS:
7399 case EXPAND_INTEGER:
7400 return true;
7401
7402 case EXPAND_CONVERT_TO:
7403 case EXPAND_CONVERT_FROM:
7404 return op1->unsigned_p == op2->unsigned_p;
7405 }
7406 gcc_unreachable ();
7407 }
7408
7409 /* Try to make operands [OPS, OPS + NOPS) match operands [OPNO, OPNO + NOPS)
7410 of instruction ICODE. Return true on success, leaving the new operand
7411 values in the OPS themselves. Emit no code on failure. */
7412
7413 bool
maybe_legitimize_operands(enum insn_code icode,unsigned int opno,unsigned int nops,class expand_operand * ops)7414 maybe_legitimize_operands (enum insn_code icode, unsigned int opno,
7415 unsigned int nops, class expand_operand *ops)
7416 {
7417 rtx_insn *last = get_last_insn ();
7418 rtx *orig_values = XALLOCAVEC (rtx, nops);
7419 for (unsigned int i = 0; i < nops; i++)
7420 {
7421 orig_values[i] = ops[i].value;
7422
7423 /* First try reusing the result of an earlier legitimization.
7424 This avoids duplicate rtl and ensures that tied operands
7425 remain tied.
7426
7427 This search is linear, but NOPS is bounded at compile time
7428 to a small number (current a single digit). */
7429 unsigned int j = 0;
7430 for (; j < i; ++j)
7431 if (can_reuse_operands_p (icode, opno + j, opno + i, &ops[j], &ops[i])
7432 && rtx_equal_p (orig_values[j], orig_values[i])
7433 && ops[j].value
7434 && insn_operand_matches (icode, opno + i, ops[j].value))
7435 {
7436 ops[i].value = copy_rtx (ops[j].value);
7437 break;
7438 }
7439
7440 /* Otherwise try legitimizing the operand on its own. */
7441 if (j == i && !maybe_legitimize_operand (icode, opno + i, &ops[i]))
7442 {
7443 delete_insns_since (last);
7444 return false;
7445 }
7446 }
7447 return true;
7448 }
7449
7450 /* Try to generate instruction ICODE, using operands [OPS, OPS + NOPS)
7451 as its operands. Return the instruction pattern on success,
7452 and emit any necessary set-up code. Return null and emit no
7453 code on failure. */
7454
7455 rtx_insn *
maybe_gen_insn(enum insn_code icode,unsigned int nops,class expand_operand * ops)7456 maybe_gen_insn (enum insn_code icode, unsigned int nops,
7457 class expand_operand *ops)
7458 {
7459 gcc_assert (nops == (unsigned int) insn_data[(int) icode].n_generator_args);
7460 if (!maybe_legitimize_operands (icode, 0, nops, ops))
7461 return NULL;
7462
7463 switch (nops)
7464 {
7465 case 1:
7466 return GEN_FCN (icode) (ops[0].value);
7467 case 2:
7468 return GEN_FCN (icode) (ops[0].value, ops[1].value);
7469 case 3:
7470 return GEN_FCN (icode) (ops[0].value, ops[1].value, ops[2].value);
7471 case 4:
7472 return GEN_FCN (icode) (ops[0].value, ops[1].value, ops[2].value,
7473 ops[3].value);
7474 case 5:
7475 return GEN_FCN (icode) (ops[0].value, ops[1].value, ops[2].value,
7476 ops[3].value, ops[4].value);
7477 case 6:
7478 return GEN_FCN (icode) (ops[0].value, ops[1].value, ops[2].value,
7479 ops[3].value, ops[4].value, ops[5].value);
7480 case 7:
7481 return GEN_FCN (icode) (ops[0].value, ops[1].value, ops[2].value,
7482 ops[3].value, ops[4].value, ops[5].value,
7483 ops[6].value);
7484 case 8:
7485 return GEN_FCN (icode) (ops[0].value, ops[1].value, ops[2].value,
7486 ops[3].value, ops[4].value, ops[5].value,
7487 ops[6].value, ops[7].value);
7488 case 9:
7489 return GEN_FCN (icode) (ops[0].value, ops[1].value, ops[2].value,
7490 ops[3].value, ops[4].value, ops[5].value,
7491 ops[6].value, ops[7].value, ops[8].value);
7492 }
7493 gcc_unreachable ();
7494 }
7495
7496 /* Try to emit instruction ICODE, using operands [OPS, OPS + NOPS)
7497 as its operands. Return true on success and emit no code on failure. */
7498
7499 bool
maybe_expand_insn(enum insn_code icode,unsigned int nops,class expand_operand * ops)7500 maybe_expand_insn (enum insn_code icode, unsigned int nops,
7501 class expand_operand *ops)
7502 {
7503 rtx_insn *pat = maybe_gen_insn (icode, nops, ops);
7504 if (pat)
7505 {
7506 emit_insn (pat);
7507 return true;
7508 }
7509 return false;
7510 }
7511
7512 /* Like maybe_expand_insn, but for jumps. */
7513
7514 bool
maybe_expand_jump_insn(enum insn_code icode,unsigned int nops,class expand_operand * ops)7515 maybe_expand_jump_insn (enum insn_code icode, unsigned int nops,
7516 class expand_operand *ops)
7517 {
7518 rtx_insn *pat = maybe_gen_insn (icode, nops, ops);
7519 if (pat)
7520 {
7521 emit_jump_insn (pat);
7522 return true;
7523 }
7524 return false;
7525 }
7526
7527 /* Emit instruction ICODE, using operands [OPS, OPS + NOPS)
7528 as its operands. */
7529
7530 void
expand_insn(enum insn_code icode,unsigned int nops,class expand_operand * ops)7531 expand_insn (enum insn_code icode, unsigned int nops,
7532 class expand_operand *ops)
7533 {
7534 if (!maybe_expand_insn (icode, nops, ops))
7535 gcc_unreachable ();
7536 }
7537
7538 /* Like expand_insn, but for jumps. */
7539
7540 void
expand_jump_insn(enum insn_code icode,unsigned int nops,class expand_operand * ops)7541 expand_jump_insn (enum insn_code icode, unsigned int nops,
7542 class expand_operand *ops)
7543 {
7544 if (!maybe_expand_jump_insn (icode, nops, ops))
7545 gcc_unreachable ();
7546 }
7547